OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/open8_urisc/open8_urisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories open8_urisc

[/] [open8_urisc/] [trunk/] [gnu/] [binutils/] [gas/] [doc/] [as.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 148

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 147 khays
\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2
@c  Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3
@c  2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
4
@c  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
6
@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7
@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8
@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9
@c         in config/tc-*.c
10
@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11
@c         in config/obj-*.c
12
@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13
@c %**start of header
14
@setfilename as.info
15
@c ---config---
16
@macro gcctabopt{body}
17
@code{\body\}
18
@end macro
19
@c defaults, config file may override:
20
@set have-stabs
21
@c ---
22
@c man begin NAME
23
@c ---
24
@include asconfig.texi
25
@include bfdver.texi
26
@c ---
27
@c man end
28
@c ---
29
@c common OR combinations of conditions
30
@ifset COFF
31
@set COFF-ELF
32
@end ifset
33
@ifset ELF
34
@set COFF-ELF
35
@end ifset
36
@ifset AOUT
37
@set aout-bout
38
@end ifset
39
@ifset ARM/Thumb
40
@set ARM
41
@end ifset
42
@ifset Blackfin
43
@set Blackfin
44
@end ifset
45
@ifset BOUT
46
@set aout-bout
47
@end ifset
48
@ifset H8/300
49
@set H8
50
@end ifset
51
@ifset SH
52
@set H8
53
@end ifset
54
@ifset HPPA
55
@set abnormal-separator
56
@end ifset
57
@c ------------
58
@ifset GENERIC
59
@settitle Using @value{AS}
60
@end ifset
61
@ifclear GENERIC
62
@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63
@end ifclear
64
@setchapternewpage odd
65
@c %**end of header
66
 
67
@c @smallbook
68
@c @set SMALL
69
@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70
@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71
@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72
@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73
@c
74
@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75
@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76
@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77
@c break.
78
@c
79
@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80
@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
81
@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82
@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
83
@c discretion, of course.
84
@ifinfo
85
@set SMALL
86
@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87
@c might as well show 'em anyways.
88
@end ifinfo
89
 
90
@ifnottex
91
@dircategory Software development
92
@direntry
93
* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
94
* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
95
@end direntry
96
@end ifnottex
97
 
98
@finalout
99
@syncodeindex ky cp
100
 
101
@copying
102
This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
 
104
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
105
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107
Inc.
108
 
109
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113
Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
114
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
 
116
@c man end
117
@end copying
118
 
119
@titlepage
120
@title Using @value{AS}
121
@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122
@ifclear GENERIC
123
@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124
@end ifclear
125
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126
@sp 1
127
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128
@end ifset
129
@sp 1
130
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131
@sp 1
132
@sp 13
133
The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134
Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135
first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136
The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137
distracting the boss while they got some work
138
done.
139
@sp 3
140
@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141
@page
142
@tex
143
{\parskip=0pt
144
\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145
\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146
}
147
%"boxit" macro for figures:
148
%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149
\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150
     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151
#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152
\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153
@end tex
154
 
155
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158
Inc.
159
 
160
      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161
      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162
      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163
      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164
      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
165
      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
 
167
@end titlepage
168
@contents
169
 
170
@ifnottex
171
@node Top
172
@top Using @value{AS}
173
 
174
This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177
@end ifset
178
version @value{VERSION}.
179
@ifclear GENERIC
180
This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182
@end ifclear
183
 
184
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185
Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
186
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
 
188
@menu
189
* Overview::                    Overview
190
* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
191
* Syntax::                      Syntax
192
* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
193
* Symbols::                     Symbols
194
* Expressions::                 Expressions
195
* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
196
@ifset ELF
197
* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
198
@end ifset
199
* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
200
* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
201
* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
202
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
203
* AS Index::                    AS Index
204
@end menu
205
@end ifnottex
206
 
207
@node Overview
208
@chapter Overview
209
@iftex
210
This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211
@ifclear GENERIC
212
This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214
@end ifclear
215
@end iftex
216
 
217
@cindex invocation summary
218
@cindex option summary
219
@cindex summary of options
220
Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
221
see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
 
223
@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
 
225
@ignore
226
@c man begin SEEALSO
227
gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228
@c man end
229
@end ignore
230
 
231
@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232
@c to be limited to one line for the header.
233
@smallexample
234
@c man begin SYNOPSIS
235
@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236
 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237
 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238
 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239
 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240
 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241
 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242
 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243
 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244
 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245
 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246
 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247
 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248
 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249
@c
250
@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
251
@c Add an empty line for separation.
252
@ifset ALPHA
253
 
254
@emph{Target Alpha options:}
255
   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256
   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257
   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258
   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259
   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260
@end ifset
261
@ifset ARC
262
 
263
@emph{Target ARC options:}
264
   [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266
@end ifset
267
@ifset ARM
268
 
269
@emph{Target ARM options:}
270
@c Don't document the deprecated options
271
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272
   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273
   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274
   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275
   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276
   [@b{-mthumb}]
277
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278
   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279
    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280
   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281
@end ifset
282
@ifset Blackfin
283
 
284
@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286
   [@b{-mfdpic}]
287
   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288
   [@b{-mnopic}]
289
@end ifset
290
@ifset CRIS
291
 
292
@emph{Target CRIS options:}
293
   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294
   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295
   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296
   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297
@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298
@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299
@end ifset
300
@ifset D10V
301
 
302
@emph{Target D10V options:}
303
   [@b{-O}]
304
@end ifset
305
@ifset D30V
306
 
307
@emph{Target D30V options:}
308
   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309
@end ifset
310
@ifset H8
311
 
312
@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
313
   [-h-tick-hex]
314
@end ifset
315
@ifset HPPA
316
@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
317
@end ifset
318
@ifset I80386
319
 
320
@emph{Target i386 options:}
321
   [@b{--32}|@b{--n32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
322
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
323
@end ifset
324
@ifset I960
325
 
326
@emph{Target i960 options:}
327
@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
328
   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
329
    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
330
   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
331
@end ifset
332
@ifset IA64
333
 
334
@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
335
   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
336
   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
337
   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
338
   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
339
   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
340
   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
341
   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
342
@end ifset
343
@ifset IP2K
344
 
345
@emph{Target IP2K options:}
346
   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
347
@end ifset
348
@ifset M32C
349
 
350
@emph{Target M32C options:}
351
   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
352
@end ifset
353
@ifset M32R
354
 
355
@emph{Target M32R options:}
356
   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
357
   @b{--W[n]p}]
358
@end ifset
359
@ifset M680X0
360
 
361
@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
362
   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
363
@end ifset
364
@ifset M68HC11
365
 
366
@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
367
   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}]
368
   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
369
   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
370
   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
371
   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
372
   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
373
@end ifset
374
@ifset MCORE
375
 
376
@emph{Target MCORE options:}
377
   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
378
   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
379
@end ifset
380
@ifset MICROBLAZE
381
@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
382
@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
383
@end ifset
384
@ifset MIPS
385
 
386
@emph{Target MIPS options:}
387
   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
388
   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
389
   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
390
   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
391
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
392
   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
393
   [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
394
   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
395
   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
396
   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
397
   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
398
   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
399
   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
400
   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
401
   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
402
   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
403
   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
404
   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
405
   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
406
   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
407
   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
408
@end ifset
409
@ifset MMIX
410
 
411
@emph{Target MMIX options:}
412
   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
413
   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
414
   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
415
   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
416
@end ifset
417
@ifset PDP11
418
 
419
@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
420
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
421
   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
422
   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
423
@end ifset
424
@ifset PJ
425
 
426
@emph{Target picoJava options:}
427
   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
428
@end ifset
429
@ifset PPC
430
 
431
@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
432
   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
433
   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
434
    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
435
    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|
436
    @b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
437
    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
438
   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
439
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
440
   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
441
   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
442
   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
443
   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
444
@end ifset
445
@ifset RX
446
 
447
@emph{Target RX options:}
448
   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
449
   [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
450
   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
451
@end ifset
452
@ifset S390
453
 
454
@emph{Target s390 options:}
455
   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
456
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
457
   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
458
@end ifset
459
@ifset SCORE
460
 
461
@emph{Target SCORE options:}
462
   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
463
   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
464
   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
465
   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
466
@end ifset
467
@ifset SPARC
468
 
469
@emph{Target SPARC options:}
470
@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
471
   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
472
    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
473
   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
474
   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
475
@end ifset
476
@ifset TIC54X
477
 
478
@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
479
 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
480
 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
481
@end ifset
482
 
483
@ifset TIC6X
484
 
485
@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
486
   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
487
   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
488
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
489
@end ifset
490 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
491 147 khays
 
492 148 khays
@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
493
   [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}]
494
@end ifset
495
@ifset TILEPRO
496
@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
497
@end ifset
498
 
499 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
500
 
501
@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
502
 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
503
 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
504
 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
505
 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
506
@end ifset
507
 
508
@ifset Z80
509
 
510
@emph{Target Z80 options:}
511
  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
512
  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
513
  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
514
  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
515
  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
516
  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
517
  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
518
@end ifset
519
 
520
@ifset Z8000
521
@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
522
@end ifset
523
 
524
@c man end
525
@end smallexample
526
 
527
@c man begin OPTIONS
528
 
529
@table @gcctabopt
530
@include at-file.texi
531
 
532
@item -a[cdghlmns]
533
Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
534
 
535
@table @gcctabopt
536
@item -ac
537
omit false conditionals
538
 
539
@item -ad
540
omit debugging directives
541
 
542
@item -ag
543
include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
544
 
545
@item -ah
546
include high-level source
547
 
548
@item -al
549
include assembly
550
 
551
@item -am
552
include macro expansions
553
 
554
@item -an
555
omit forms processing
556
 
557
@item -as
558
include symbols
559
 
560
@item =file
561
set the name of the listing file
562
@end table
563
 
564
You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
565
listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
566
the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
567
 
568
@item --alternate
569
Begin in alternate macro mode.
570
@ifclear man
571
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
572
@end ifclear
573
 
574
@item --compress-debug-sections
575
Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed
576
to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
577
compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
578
 
579
@item --nocompress-debug-sections
580
Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is the default.
581
 
582
@item -D
583
Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
584
other assemblers.
585
 
586
@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
587
When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
588
information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
589
 
590
@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
591
Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
592
@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
593
indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
594
value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
595
use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
596
 
597
@item -f
598
``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
599
compiler output).
600
 
601
@item -g
602
@itemx --gen-debug
603
Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
604
debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
605
ECOFF or DWARF2.
606
 
607
@item --gstabs
608
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
609
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
610
 
611
@item --gstabs+
612
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
613
extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
614
debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
615
may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
616
the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
617
 
618
@item --gdwarf-2
619
Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
620
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
621
option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
622
 
623
@item --size-check=error
624
@itemx --size-check=warning
625
Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
626
 
627
@item --help
628
Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
629
 
630
@item --target-help
631
Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
632
 
633
@item -I @var{dir}
634
Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
635
 
636
@item -J
637
Don't warn about signed overflow.
638
 
639
@item -K
640
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
641
This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
642
@end ifclear
643
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
644
Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
645
@end ifset
646
 
647
@item -L
648
@itemx --keep-locals
649
Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
650
system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
651
or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
652
@ifclear man
653
@xref{Symbol Names}.
654
@end ifclear
655
 
656
@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
657
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
658
listing to @var{number}.
659
 
660
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
661
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
662
lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
663
 
664
@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
665
Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
666
@var{number} bytes.
667
 
668
@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
669
Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
670
to @var{number} + 1.
671
 
672
@item -o @var{objfile}
673
Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
674
 
675
@item -R
676
Fold the data section into the text section.
677
 
678
@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
679
Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
680
@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
681
assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
682
memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
683
requirements at the expense of speed.
684
 
685
@item --reduce-memory-overheads
686
This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
687
assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
688
@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
689
 
690
@item --statistics
691
Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
692
assembly.
693
 
694
@item --strip-local-absolute
695
Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
696
 
697
@item -v
698
@itemx -version
699
Print the @command{as} version.
700
 
701
@item --version
702
Print the @command{as} version and exit.
703
 
704
@item -W
705
@itemx --no-warn
706
Suppress warning messages.
707
 
708
@item --fatal-warnings
709
Treat warnings as errors.
710
 
711
@item --warn
712
Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
713
 
714
@item -w
715
Ignored.
716
 
717
@item -x
718
Ignored.
719
 
720
@item -Z
721
Generate an object file even after errors.
722
 
723
@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
724
Standard input, or source files to assemble.
725
 
726
@end table
727
@c man end
728
 
729
@ifset ALPHA
730
 
731
@ifclear man
732
@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
733
for an Alpha processor.
734
@end ifclear
735
 
736
@ifset man
737
@c man begin OPTIONS
738
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
739
processor.
740
@c man end
741
@c man begin INCLUDE
742
@include c-alpha.texi
743
@c ended inside the included file
744
@end ifset
745
 
746
@end ifset
747
 
748
@c man begin OPTIONS
749
@ifset ARC
750
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
751
an ARC processor.
752
 
753
@table @gcctabopt
754
@item -marc[5|6|7|8]
755
This option selects the core processor variant.
756
@item -EB | -EL
757
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
758
@end table
759
@end ifset
760
 
761
@ifset ARM
762
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
763
processor family.
764
 
765
@table @gcctabopt
766
@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
767
Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
768
@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
769
Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
770
@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
771
Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
772
@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
773
Select which floating point ABI is in use.
774
@item -mthumb
775
Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
776
@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
777
Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
778
@item -EB | -EL
779
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
780
@item -mthumb-interwork
781
Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
782
ARM code in mind.
783
@item -k
784
Specify that PIC code has been generated.
785
@end table
786
@end ifset
787
@c man end
788
 
789
@ifset Blackfin
790
 
791
@ifclear man
792
@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
793
configured for the Blackfin processor family.
794
@end ifclear
795
 
796
@ifset man
797
@c man begin OPTIONS
798
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
799
the Blackfin processor family.
800
@c man end
801
@c man begin INCLUDE
802
@include c-bfin.texi
803
@c ended inside the included file
804
@end ifset
805
 
806
@end ifset
807
 
808
@c man begin OPTIONS
809
@ifset CRIS
810
See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
811
@end ifset
812
 
813
@ifset D10V
814
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
815
a D10V processor.
816
@table @gcctabopt
817
@cindex D10V optimization
818
@cindex optimization, D10V
819
@item -O
820
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
821
@end table
822
@end ifset
823
 
824
@ifset D30V
825
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
826
processor.
827
@table @gcctabopt
828
@cindex D30V optimization
829
@cindex optimization, D30V
830
@item -O
831
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
832
 
833
@cindex D30V nops
834
@item -n
835
Warn when nops are generated.
836
 
837
@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
838
@item -N
839
Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
840
@end table
841
@end ifset
842
@c man end
843
 
844
@ifset I80386
845
 
846
@ifclear man
847
@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
848
configured for an i386 processor.
849
@end ifclear
850
 
851
@ifset man
852
@c man begin OPTIONS
853
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
854
an i386 processor.
855
@c man end
856
@c man begin INCLUDE
857
@include c-i386.texi
858
@c ended inside the included file
859
@end ifset
860
 
861
@end ifset
862
 
863
@c man begin OPTIONS
864
@ifset I960
865
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
866
Intel 80960 processor.
867
 
868
@table @gcctabopt
869
@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
870
Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
871
 
872
@item -b
873
Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
874
 
875
@item -no-relax
876
Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
877
error if necessary.
878
 
879
@end table
880
@end ifset
881
 
882
@ifset IP2K
883
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
884
Ubicom IP2K series.
885
 
886
@table @gcctabopt
887
 
888
@item -mip2022ext
889
Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
890
 
891
@item -mip2022
892
Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
893
just the basic IP2022 ones.
894
 
895
@end table
896
@end ifset
897
 
898
@ifset M32C
899
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
900
Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
901
 
902
@table @gcctabopt
903
 
904
@item -m32c
905
Assemble M32C instructions.
906
 
907
@item -m16c
908
Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
909
 
910
@item -relax
911
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
912
 
913
@item -h-tick-hex
914
Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
915
 
916
@end table
917
@end ifset
918
 
919
@ifset M32R
920
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
921
Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
922
 
923
@table @gcctabopt
924
 
925
@item --m32rx
926
Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
927
is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
928
 
929
@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
930
Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
931
encountered.
932
 
933
@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
934
Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
935
encountered.
936
 
937
@end table
938
@end ifset
939
 
940
@ifset M680X0
941
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
942
Motorola 68000 series.
943
 
944
@table @gcctabopt
945
 
946
@item -l
947
Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
948
 
949
@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
950
@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
951
@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
952
Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
953
is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
954
 
955
@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
956
The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
957
The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
958
the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
959
two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
960
coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
961
 
962
@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
963
The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
964
unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
965
 
966
@end table
967
@end ifset
968
 
969
@ifset PDP11
970
 
971
For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
972
see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
973
 
974
@table @gcctabopt
975
@item -mpic | -mno-pic
976
Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
977
default is @option{-mpic}.
978
 
979
@item -mall
980
@itemx -mall-extensions
981
Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
982
 
983
@item -mno-extensions
984
Disable all instruction set extensions.
985
 
986
@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
987
Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
988
 
989
@item -m@var{cpu}
990
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
991
disable all other extensions.
992
 
993
@item -m@var{machine}
994
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
995
model, and disable all other extensions.
996
@end table
997
 
998
@end ifset
999
 
1000
@ifset PJ
1001
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1002
a picoJava processor.
1003
 
1004
@table @gcctabopt
1005
 
1006
@cindex PJ endianness
1007
@cindex endianness, PJ
1008
@cindex big endian output, PJ
1009
@item -mb
1010
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1011
 
1012
@cindex little endian output, PJ
1013
@item -ml
1014
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1015
 
1016
@end table
1017
@end ifset
1018
 
1019
@ifset M68HC11
1020
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1021
Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1022
 
1023
@table @gcctabopt
1024
 
1025
@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12
1026
Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
1027
defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1028
 
1029
@item -mshort
1030
Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1031
 
1032
@item -mlong
1033
Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1034
 
1035
@item -mshort-double
1036
Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1037
 
1038
@item -mlong-double
1039
Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1040
 
1041
@item --force-long-branches
1042
Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1043
conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1044
sub routine.
1045
 
1046
@item -S | --short-branches
1047
Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1048
when the offset is out of range.
1049
 
1050
@item --strict-direct-mode
1051
Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1052
when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1053
 
1054
@item --print-insn-syntax
1055
Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1056
 
1057
@item --print-opcodes
1058
print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1059
 
1060
@item --generate-example
1061
print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1062
This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1063
 
1064
@end table
1065
@end ifset
1066
 
1067
@ifset SPARC
1068
The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1069
for the SPARC architecture:
1070
 
1071
@table @gcctabopt
1072
@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1073
@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1074
Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1075
 
1076
@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1077
@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1078
 
1079
@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1080
UltraSPARC extensions.
1081
 
1082
@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1083
For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
1084
equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1085
 
1086
@item -bump
1087
Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1088
@end table
1089
@end ifset
1090
 
1091
@ifset TIC54X
1092
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1093
architecture.
1094
 
1095
@table @gcctabopt
1096
@item -mfar-mode
1097
Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
1098
extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1099
@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1100
Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1101
@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1102
Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1103
behaviour in the shell.
1104
@end table
1105
@end ifset
1106
 
1107
@ifset MIPS
1108
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1109
a @sc{mips} processor.
1110
 
1111
@table @gcctabopt
1112
@item -G @var{num}
1113
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1114
implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
1115
use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
1116
 
1117
@cindex MIPS endianness
1118
@cindex endianness, MIPS
1119
@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1120
@item -EB
1121
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1122
 
1123
@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1124
@item -EL
1125
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1126
 
1127
@cindex MIPS ISA
1128
@item -mips1
1129
@itemx -mips2
1130
@itemx -mips3
1131
@itemx -mips4
1132
@itemx -mips5
1133
@itemx -mips32
1134
@itemx -mips32r2
1135
@itemx -mips64
1136
@itemx -mips64r2
1137
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1138
@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1139
alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1140
@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1141
@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1142
@samp{-mips64r2}
1143
correspond to generic
1144
@samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1145
and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1146
ISA processors, respectively.
1147
 
1148
@item -march=@var{CPU}
1149
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1150
 
1151
@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1152
Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1153
 
1154
@item -mfix7000
1155
@itemx -mno-fix7000
1156
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1157
of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1158
 
1159
@item -mdebug
1160
@itemx -no-mdebug
1161
Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1162
section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1163
 
1164
@item -mpdr
1165
@itemx -mno-pdr
1166
Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1167
 
1168
@item -mgp32
1169
@itemx -mfp32
1170
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1171
flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1172
all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1173
and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1174
 
1175
@item -mips16
1176
@itemx -no-mips16
1177
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1178
@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1179
turns off this option.
1180
 
1181
@item -msmartmips
1182
@itemx -mno-smartmips
1183
Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1184
equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1185
@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1186
 
1187
@item -mips3d
1188
@itemx -no-mips3d
1189
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1190
This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1191
@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1192
 
1193
@item -mdmx
1194
@itemx -no-mdmx
1195
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1196
This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1197
@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1198
 
1199
@item -mdsp
1200
@itemx -mno-dsp
1201
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1202
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1203
@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1204
 
1205
@item -mdspr2
1206
@itemx -mno-dspr2
1207
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1208
This option implies -mdsp.
1209
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1210
@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1211
 
1212
@item -mmt
1213
@itemx -mno-mt
1214
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1215
This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1216
@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1217
 
1218
@item --construct-floats
1219
@itemx --no-construct-floats
1220
The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1221
double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1222
value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1223
the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1224
selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1225
 
1226
@cindex emulation
1227
@item --emulation=@var{name}
1228
This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1229
for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1230
between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1231
debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1232
endianness.  The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1233
@samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1234
@samp{mipsbelf}.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1235
of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1236
the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1237
in the name.  Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1238
selection in any case.
1239
 
1240
This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1241
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1242
Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1243
@samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1244
the other format, if both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5
1245
configuration includes support for both.
1246
 
1247
Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1248
fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1249
more processors.
1250
 
1251
@item -nocpp
1252
@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1253
the native tools.
1254
 
1255
@item --trap
1256
@itemx --no-trap
1257
@itemx --break
1258
@itemx --no-break
1259
Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1260
@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1261
(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1262
@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1263
break exception.
1264
 
1265
@item -n
1266
When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1267
time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1268
@end table
1269
@end ifset
1270
 
1271
@ifset MCORE
1272
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1273
an MCore processor.
1274
 
1275
@table @gcctabopt
1276
@item -jsri2bsr
1277
@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1278
Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1279
The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1280
 
1281
@item -sifilter
1282
@itemx -nosifilter
1283
Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1284
The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1285
 
1286
@item -relax
1287
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1288
 
1289
@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1290
Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1291
can be assembled.
1292
 
1293
@item -EB
1294
Assemble for a big endian target.
1295
 
1296
@item -EL
1297
Assemble for a little endian target.
1298
 
1299
@end table
1300
@end ifset
1301
 
1302
@ifset MMIX
1303
See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1304
@end ifset
1305
 
1306
@c man end
1307
@ifset PPC
1308
 
1309
@ifclear man
1310
@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1311
for a PowerPC processor.
1312
@end ifclear
1313
 
1314
@ifset man
1315
@c man begin OPTIONS
1316
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1317
PowerPC processor.
1318
@c man end
1319
@c man begin INCLUDE
1320
@include c-ppc.texi
1321
@c ended inside the included file
1322
@end ifset
1323
 
1324
@end ifset
1325
 
1326
@c man begin OPTIONS
1327
@ifset RX
1328
See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1329
@end ifset
1330
 
1331
@ifset S390
1332
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1333
processor family.
1334
 
1335
@table @gcctabopt
1336
@item -m31
1337
@itemx -m64
1338
Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1339
@item -mesa
1340
@item -mzarch
1341
Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1342
Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1343
@item -march=@var{processor}
1344
Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1345
@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1346
@item -mregnames
1347
@itemx -mno-regnames
1348
Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1349
@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1350
Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1351
but evaluates to zero.
1352
@end table
1353
@end ifset
1354
@c man end
1355
 
1356
@ifset TIC6X
1357
 
1358
@ifclear man
1359
@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1360
for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1361
@end ifclear
1362
 
1363
@ifset man
1364
@c man begin OPTIONS
1365
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1366
TMS320C6000 processor.
1367
@c man end
1368
@c man begin INCLUDE
1369
@include c-tic6x.texi
1370
@c ended inside the included file
1371
@end ifset
1372
 
1373
@end ifset
1374
 
1375 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
1376
 
1377
@ifclear man
1378
@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1379
for a TILE-Gx processor.
1380
@end ifclear
1381
 
1382
@ifset man
1383
@c man begin OPTIONS
1384
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1385
processor.
1386
@c man end
1387
@c man begin INCLUDE
1388
@include c-tilegx.texi
1389
@c ended inside the included file
1390
@end ifset
1391
 
1392
@end ifset
1393
 
1394 147 khays
@ifset XTENSA
1395
 
1396
@ifclear man
1397
@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1398
for an Xtensa processor.
1399
@end ifclear
1400
 
1401
@ifset man
1402
@c man begin OPTIONS
1403
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1404
Xtensa processor.
1405
@c man end
1406
@c man begin INCLUDE
1407
@include c-xtensa.texi
1408
@c ended inside the included file
1409
@end ifset
1410
 
1411
@end ifset
1412
 
1413
@c man begin OPTIONS
1414
 
1415
@ifset Z80
1416
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1417
a Z80 family processor.
1418
@table @gcctabopt
1419
@item -z80
1420
Assemble for Z80 processor.
1421
@item -r800
1422
Assemble for R800 processor.
1423
@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1424
@itemx -Wnud
1425
Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1426
@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1427
@itemx -Wnup
1428
Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1429
@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1430
@itemx -Wud
1431
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1432
@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1433
@itemx -Wup
1434
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1435
@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1436
@itemx -Fud
1437
Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1438
@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1439
@itemx -Fup
1440
Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1441
@end table
1442
@end ifset
1443
 
1444
@c man end
1445
 
1446
@menu
1447
* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1448
* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1449
* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1450
* Command Line::                Command Line
1451
* Input Files::                 Input Files
1452
* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1453
* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1454
@end menu
1455
 
1456
@node Manual
1457
@section Structure of this Manual
1458
 
1459
@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1460
This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1461
@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1462
notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1463
@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1464
 
1465
@ifclear GENERIC
1466
We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1467
configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1468
@end ifclear
1469
@ifset GENERIC
1470
This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1471
various flavors of the assembler.
1472
@end ifset
1473
 
1474
@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1475
On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1476
to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1477
In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1478
architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1479
mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1480
particular architecture.
1481
@ifset GENERIC
1482
You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1483
machine architecture manual for this information.
1484
@end ifset
1485
@ifclear GENERIC
1486
@ifset H8/300
1487
For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1488
Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1489
Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1490
@end ifset
1491
@ifset SH
1492
For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1493
see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1494
@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1495
@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1496
@end ifset
1497
@ifset Z8000
1498
For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1499
@end ifset
1500
@end ifclear
1501
 
1502
@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1503
@ignore
1504
Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1505
the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1506
Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1507
computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1508
once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1509
qualification.
1510
 
1511
@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1512
human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1513
computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1514
@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1515
@end ignore
1516
 
1517
@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1518
@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1519
@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1520
@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1521
@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1522
@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1523
@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1524
@c directives).
1525
 
1526
@node GNU Assembler
1527
@section The GNU Assembler
1528
 
1529
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1530
 
1531
@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1532
@ifclear GENERIC
1533
This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1534
configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1535
@end ifclear
1536
If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1537
should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1538
architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1539
including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1540
@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1541
 
1542
@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1543
@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1544
@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1545
@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1546
assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1547
machine would assemble.
1548
@ifset VAX
1549
Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1550
@end ifset
1551
@ifset M680X0
1552
@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1553
@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1554
This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1555
assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1556
incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1557
@end ifset
1558
 
1559
@c man end
1560
 
1561
Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1562
program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1563
@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1564
 
1565
@node Object Formats
1566
@section Object File Formats
1567
 
1568
@cindex object file format
1569
The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1570
object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1571
write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1572
are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1573
Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1574
@ifclear GENERIC
1575
@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1576
For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1577
@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1578
@end ifclear
1579
@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1580
@ifset I960
1581
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1582
@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1583
@end ifset
1584
@ifset HPPA
1585
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1586
SOM or ELF format object files.
1587
@end ifset
1588
@end ifclear
1589
 
1590
@node Command Line
1591
@section Command Line
1592
 
1593
@cindex command line conventions
1594
 
1595
After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1596
options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1597
before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1598
significant.
1599
 
1600
@cindex standard input, as input file
1601
@kindex --
1602
@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1603
explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1604
 
1605
@cindex options, command line
1606
Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1607
hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1608
@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1609
option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1610
the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1611
 
1612
Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1613
name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1614
with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1615
standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1616
 
1617
@smallexample
1618
@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1619
@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1620
@end smallexample
1621
 
1622
@node Input Files
1623
@section Input Files
1624
 
1625
@cindex input
1626
@cindex source program
1627
@cindex files, input
1628
We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1629
describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
1630
be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1631
doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1632
 
1633
@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1634
@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
1635
The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1636
order specified.
1637
 
1638
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1639
Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1640
program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
1641
(The standard input is also a file.)
1642
 
1643
You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1644
names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
1645
command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1646
is taken to be an input file name.
1647
 
1648
If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1649
from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
1650
may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1651
to assemble.
1652
 
1653
Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1654
in your command line.
1655
 
1656
If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1657
file.
1658
 
1659
@c man end
1660
 
1661
@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1662
 
1663
@cindex input file linenumbers
1664
@cindex line numbers, in input files
1665
There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1666
either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
1667
number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1668
``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1669
 
1670
@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1671
to @command{@value{AS}}.
1672
 
1673
@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1674
directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
1675
error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1676
is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1677
@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
1678
@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1679
 
1680
@node Object
1681
@section Output (Object) File
1682
 
1683
@cindex object file
1684
@cindex output file
1685
@kindex a.out
1686
@kindex .o
1687
Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1688
your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
1689
is the object file.  Its default name is
1690
@ifclear BOUT
1691
@code{a.out}.
1692
@end ifclear
1693
@ifset BOUT
1694
@ifset GENERIC
1695
@code{a.out}, or
1696
@end ifset
1697
@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1698
@end ifset
1699
You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
1700
object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
1701
reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1702
directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
1703
possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1704
 
1705
@cindex linker
1706
@kindex ld
1707
The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
1708
assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1709
the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1710
information for the debugger.
1711
 
1712
@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1713
@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1714
 
1715
@node Errors
1716
@section Error and Warning Messages
1717
 
1718
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1719
 
1720
@cindex error messages
1721
@cindex warning messages
1722
@cindex messages from assembler
1723
@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1724
file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
1725
runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
1726
that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1727
grave problem that stops the assembly.
1728
 
1729
@c man end
1730
 
1731
@cindex format of warning messages
1732
Warning messages have the format
1733
 
1734
@smallexample
1735
file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1736
@end smallexample
1737
 
1738
@noindent
1739
@cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1740
(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
1741
(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1742
the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
1743
@ifset GENERIC
1744
(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1745
@end ifset
1746
then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1747
otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed.  The
1748
message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1749
tradition).
1750
 
1751
@cindex format of error messages
1752
Error messages have the format
1753
@smallexample
1754
file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1755
@end smallexample
1756
The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1757
messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1758
because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1759
 
1760
@node Invoking
1761
@chapter Command-Line Options
1762
 
1763
@cindex options, all versions of assembler
1764
This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1765
versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1766
for options specific
1767
@ifclear GENERIC
1768
to the @value{TARGET} target.
1769
@end ifclear
1770
@ifset GENERIC
1771
to particular machine architectures.
1772
@end ifset
1773
 
1774
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1775
 
1776
If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1777
you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1778
The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1779
by commas.  For example:
1780
 
1781
@smallexample
1782
gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1783
@end smallexample
1784
 
1785
@noindent
1786
This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1787
standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1788
local symbols in the symbol table).
1789
 
1790
Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1791
command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1792
(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1793
precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1794
assembler.)
1795
 
1796
@c man end
1797
 
1798
@menu
1799
* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1800
* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1801
* D::             -D for compatibility
1802
* f::             -f to work faster
1803
* I::             -I for .include search path
1804
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1805
* K::             -K for compatibility
1806
@end ifclear
1807
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1808
* K::             -K for difference tables
1809
@end ifset
1810
 
1811
* L::             -L to retain local symbols
1812
* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1813
* M::             -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1814
* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
1815
* o::             -o to name the object file
1816
* R::             -R to join data and text sections
1817
* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1818
* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1819
* v::             -v to announce version
1820
* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1821
* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
1822
@end menu
1823
 
1824
@node a
1825
@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1826
 
1827
@kindex -a
1828
@kindex -ac
1829
@kindex -ad
1830
@kindex -ag
1831
@kindex -ah
1832
@kindex -al
1833
@kindex -an
1834
@kindex -as
1835
@cindex listings, enabling
1836
@cindex assembly listings, enabling
1837
 
1838
These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
1839
@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1840
You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1841
@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1842
@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1843
@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1844
High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1845
@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1846
also.
1847
 
1848
Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1849
information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1850
 
1851
Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
1852
which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1853
other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1854
omitted from the listing.
1855
 
1856
Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1857
listing.
1858
 
1859
Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1860
listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1861
@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1862
@code{.sbttl}.
1863
The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1864
If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1865
listing-control directives have no effect.
1866
 
1867
The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1868
@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1869
 
1870
Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1871
because it
1872
is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1873
is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1874
directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1875
stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
1876
memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1877
 
1878
@node alternate
1879
@section @option{--alternate}
1880
 
1881
@kindex --alternate
1882
Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1883
 
1884
@node D
1885
@section @option{-D}
1886
 
1887
@kindex -D
1888
This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1889
likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1890
@command{@value{AS}}.
1891
 
1892
@node f
1893
@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1894
 
1895
@kindex -f
1896
@cindex trusted compiler
1897
@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1898
@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1899
(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1900
and comment preprocessing on
1901
the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
1902
,Preprocessing}.
1903
 
1904
@quotation
1905
@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1906
preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1907
not work correctly.
1908
@end quotation
1909
 
1910
@node I
1911
@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1912
 
1913
@kindex -I @var{path}
1914
@cindex paths for @code{.include}
1915
@cindex search path for @code{.include}
1916
@cindex @code{include} directive search path
1917
Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1918
@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1919
directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
1920
many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
1921
working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1922
searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1923
specified (left to right) on the command line.
1924
 
1925
@node K
1926
@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1927
 
1928
@kindex -K
1929
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1930
On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
1931
permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1932
where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1933
generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
1934
family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1935
alteration on other platforms.
1936
@end ifclear
1937
 
1938
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1939
@cindex difference tables, warning
1940
@cindex warning for altered difference tables
1941
@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1942
form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1943
You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1944
is done.
1945
@end ifset
1946
 
1947
@node L
1948
@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1949
 
1950
@kindex -L
1951
@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1952
Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1953
@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1954
called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
1955
such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
1956
programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
1957
notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
1958
such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
1959
 
1960
This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
1961
in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
1962
@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
1963
 
1964
@node listing
1965
@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
1966
 
1967
The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
1968
@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
1969
hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
1970
them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
1971
directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
1972
@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
1973
@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
1974
@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
1975
 
1976
@table @gcctabopt
1977
@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
1978
@kindex --listing-lhs-width
1979
@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
1980
Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
1981
dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
1982
 
1983
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
1984
@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
1985
@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
1986
Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
1987
a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
1988
the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
1989
switch is used the default is to one.
1990
 
1991
@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
1992
@kindex --listing-rhs-width
1993
@cindex Width of source line output
1994
Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
1995
alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
1996
source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
1997
 
1998
@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
1999
@kindex --listing-cont-lines
2000
@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2001
Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2002
displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
2003
@end table
2004
 
2005
@node M
2006
@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2007
 
2008
@kindex -M
2009
@cindex MRI compatibility mode
2010
The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
2011
changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2012
compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2013
configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
2014
MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2015
information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2016
arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
2017
assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2018
 
2019
The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2020
depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2021
file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2022
individually.  These are:
2023
 
2024
@itemize @bullet
2025
@item global symbols in common section
2026
 
2027
The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2028
Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
2029
common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
2030
symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2031
symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2032
 
2033
@item complex relocations
2034
 
2035
The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2036
relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
2037
are not support by other object file formats.
2038
 
2039
@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2040
 
2041
The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2042
This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
2043
instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2044
script.
2045
 
2046
@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2047
 
2048
The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2049
name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
2050
 
2051
@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2052
 
2053
The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2054
address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2055
which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
2056
not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
2057
assigned within a linker script.
2058
@end itemize
2059
 
2060
There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2061
@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2062
seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2063
 
2064
@itemize @bullet
2065
 
2066
@item EBCDIC strings
2067
 
2068
EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2069
 
2070
@item packed binary coded decimal
2071
 
2072
Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
2073
and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2074
 
2075
@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2076
 
2077
The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2078
 
2079
@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2080
 
2081
The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2082
 
2083
@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2084
 
2085
The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2086
@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2087
relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2088
these options serve no purpose.
2089
 
2090
@item @code{OPT} list control options
2091
 
2092
The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2093
@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2094
@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2095
 
2096
@item other @code{OPT} options
2097
 
2098
The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2099
@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2100
 
2101
@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2102
 
2103
The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2104
@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2105
 
2106
@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2107
 
2108
The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2109
 
2110
@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2111
 
2112
The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2113
 
2114
@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2115
 
2116
The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2117
 
2118
@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2119
 
2120
The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2121
 
2122
@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2123
 
2124
The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2125
 
2126
@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2127
 
2128
The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2129
 
2130
@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2131
 
2132
The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2133
 
2134
@end itemize
2135
 
2136
@node MD
2137
@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2138
 
2139
@kindex --MD
2140
@cindex dependency tracking
2141
@cindex make rules
2142
 
2143
@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
2144
file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2145
dependencies of the main source file.
2146
 
2147
The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2148
 
2149
This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2150
 
2151
@node o
2152
@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2153
 
2154
@kindex -o
2155
@cindex naming object file
2156
@cindex object file name
2157
There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
2158
default it has the name
2159
@ifset GENERIC
2160
@ifset I960
2161
@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2162
@end ifset
2163
@ifclear I960
2164
@file{a.out}.
2165
@end ifclear
2166
@end ifset
2167
@ifclear GENERIC
2168
@ifset I960
2169
@file{b.out}.
2170
@end ifset
2171
@ifclear I960
2172
@file{a.out}.
2173
@end ifclear
2174
@end ifclear
2175
You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2176
object file a different name.
2177
 
2178
Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2179
existing file of the same name.
2180
 
2181
@node R
2182
@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2183
 
2184
@kindex -R
2185
@cindex data and text sections, joining
2186
@cindex text and data sections, joining
2187
@cindex joining text and data sections
2188
@cindex merging text and data sections
2189
@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2190
data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2191
the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2192
section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2193
your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2194
appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2195
 
2196
When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2197
address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2198
data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2199
older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2200
 
2201
@ifset COFF-ELF
2202
When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2203
this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2204
@samp{.data}.
2205
@end ifset
2206
 
2207
@ifset HPPA
2208
@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2209
@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2210
@end ifset
2211
 
2212
@node statistics
2213
@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2214
 
2215
@kindex --statistics
2216
@cindex statistics, about assembly
2217
@cindex time, total for assembly
2218
@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2219
Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2220
@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2221
(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2222
seconds).
2223
 
2224
@node traditional-format
2225
@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2226
 
2227
@kindex --traditional-format
2228
For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2229
from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2230
@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2231
 
2232
For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2233
@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2234
 
2235
@node v
2236
@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2237
 
2238
@kindex -v
2239
@kindex -version
2240
@cindex assembler version
2241
@cindex version of assembler
2242
You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2243
option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2244
command line.
2245
 
2246
@node W
2247
@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2248
 
2249
@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2250
assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2251
cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2252
made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2253
 
2254
@kindex -W
2255
@kindex --no-warn
2256
@cindex suppressing warnings
2257
@cindex warnings, suppressing
2258
If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2259
This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2260
how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2261
are still reported.
2262
 
2263
@kindex --fatal-warnings
2264
@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2265
@cindex warnings, causing error
2266
If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2267
files that generate warnings to be in error.
2268
 
2269
@kindex --warn
2270
@cindex warnings, switching on
2271
You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2272
causes warnings to be output as usual.
2273
 
2274
@node Z
2275
@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2276
@cindex object file, after errors
2277
@cindex errors, continuing after
2278
After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2279
some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2280
@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2281
option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2282
writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2283
errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2284
 
2285
@node Syntax
2286
@chapter Syntax
2287
 
2288
@cindex machine-independent syntax
2289
@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2290
This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2291
source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2292
assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2293
@ifclear VAX
2294
assembler.
2295
@end ifclear
2296
@ifset VAX
2297
assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2298
@end ifset
2299
 
2300
@menu
2301
* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
2302
* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2303
* Comments::                    Comments
2304
* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2305
* Statements::                  Statements
2306
* Constants::                   Constants
2307
@end menu
2308
 
2309
@node Preprocessing
2310
@section Preprocessing
2311
 
2312
@cindex preprocessing
2313
The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2314
@itemize @bullet
2315
@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2316
@item
2317
adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2318
the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2319
a single space.
2320
 
2321
@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2322
@item
2323
removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2324
appropriate number of newlines.
2325
 
2326
@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2327
@item
2328
converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2329
@end itemize
2330
 
2331
It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2332
anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2333
do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2334
(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2335
to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2336
@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2337
Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2338
 
2339
Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2340
cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2341
preprocessed.
2342
 
2343
@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2344
@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2345
@kindex #NO_APP
2346
@kindex #APP
2347
If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2348
@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2349
Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2350
specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2351
text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2352
@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2353
@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2354
and whitespace.
2355
 
2356
@node Whitespace
2357
@section Whitespace
2358
 
2359
@cindex whitespace
2360
@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2361
Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2362
people to read.  Unless within character constants
2363
(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2364
as exactly one space.
2365
 
2366
@node Comments
2367
@section Comments
2368
 
2369
@cindex comments
2370
There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2371
cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2372
 
2373
Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2374
This means you may not nest these comments.
2375
 
2376
@smallexample
2377
/*
2378
  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2379
  is to use this sort of comment.
2380
*/
2381
 
2382
/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2383
@end smallexample
2384
 
2385
@cindex line comment character
2386
Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2387
considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
2388
specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
2389
line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2390
line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2391
comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2392
upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
2393
@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2394
 
2395
If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2396
special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2397
to specify logical line numbers:
2398
 
2399
@kindex #
2400
@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2401
@cindex logical line numbers
2402
To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2403
special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2404
expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2405
line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2406
new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2407
 
2408
If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2409
the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2410
 
2411
@smallexample
2412
                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2413
# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2414
                          # This is logical line # 36.
2415
@end smallexample
2416
This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2417
of @command{@value{AS}}.
2418
 
2419
@node Symbol Intro
2420
@section Symbols
2421
 
2422
@cindex characters used in symbols
2423
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2424
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2425
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2426
@samp{_.$}.
2427
@end ifclear
2428
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2429
@ifclear GENERIC
2430
@ifset H8
2431
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2432
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2433
@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2434
symbol names.)
2435
@end ifset
2436
@end ifclear
2437
@end ifset
2438
@ifset GENERIC
2439
On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2440
are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2441
@end ifset
2442
No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2443
There is no length limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are
2444
delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2445
(since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2446
not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2447
@cindex length of symbols
2448
 
2449
@node Statements
2450
@section Statements
2451
 
2452
@cindex statements, structure of
2453
@cindex line separator character
2454
@cindex statement separator character
2455
 
2456
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2457
@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
2458
specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2459
target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
2460
The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2461
preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2462
exception: they do not end statements.
2463
 
2464
@cindex newline, required at file end
2465
@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2466
It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2467
character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2468
 
2469
An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2470
 
2471
@cindex instructions and directives
2472
@cindex directives and instructions
2473
@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2474
@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2475
@c 13feb91.
2476
A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2477
key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2478
symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2479
symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2480
directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2481
a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2482
assembles into a machine language instruction.
2483
@ifset GENERIC
2484
Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2485
recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2486
represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2487
language.@refill
2488
@end ifset
2489
 
2490
@cindex @code{:} (label)
2491
@cindex label (@code{:})
2492
A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2493
Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2494
have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2495
 
2496
@ifset HPPA
2497
For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2498
the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2499
only one label may be defined on each line.
2500
@end ifset
2501
 
2502
@smallexample
2503
label:     .directive    followed by something
2504
another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2505
           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2506
@end smallexample
2507
 
2508
@node Constants
2509
@section Constants
2510
 
2511
@cindex constants
2512
A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2513
inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2514
@smallexample
2515
@group
2516
.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2517
.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2518
.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2519
.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2520
95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2521
@end group
2522
@end smallexample
2523
 
2524
@menu
2525
* Characters::                  Character Constants
2526
* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2527
@end menu
2528
 
2529
@node Characters
2530
@subsection Character Constants
2531
 
2532
@cindex character constants
2533
@cindex constants, character
2534
There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2535
for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2536
numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2537
@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2538
used in arithmetic expressions.
2539
 
2540
@menu
2541
* Strings::                     Strings
2542
* Chars::                       Characters
2543
@end menu
2544
 
2545
@node Strings
2546
@subsubsection Strings
2547
 
2548
@cindex string constants
2549
@cindex constants, string
2550
A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2551
double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2552
into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2553
a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2554
one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2555
@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2556
(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2557
escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2558
 
2559
@cindex escape codes, character
2560
@cindex character escape codes
2561
@table @kbd
2562
@c      @item \a
2563
@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2564
@c
2565
@cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2566
@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2567
@item \b
2568
Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2569
 
2570
@c      @item \e
2571
@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2572
@c
2573
@cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2574
@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2575
@item \f
2576
Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2577
 
2578
@cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2579
@cindex newline (@code{\n})
2580
@item \n
2581
Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2582
 
2583
@c      @item \p
2584
@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2585
@c
2586
@cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2587
@cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2588
@item \r
2589
Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2590
 
2591
@c      @item \s
2592
@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
2593
@c      other assemblers.
2594
@c
2595
@cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2596
@cindex tab (@code{\t})
2597
@item \t
2598
Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2599
 
2600
@c      @item \v
2601
@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2602
@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2603
@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2604
@c
2605
@cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2606
@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2607
@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2608
An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2609
For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2610
for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2611
 
2612
@cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2613
@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2614
@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2615
A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
2616
lower case @code{x} works.
2617
 
2618
@cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2619
@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2620
@item \\
2621
Represents one @samp{\} character.
2622
 
2623
@c      @item \'
2624
@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2625
@c      This is needed in single character literals
2626
@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2627
@c      a @samp{'}.
2628
@c
2629
@cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2630
@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2631
@item \"
2632
Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
2633
this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2634
 
2635
@item \ @var{anything-else}
2636
Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2637
assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
2638
you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2639
interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2640
other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2641
code and warns you of the fact.
2642
@end table
2643
 
2644
Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2645
varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
2646
the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2647
compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2648
sequence.
2649
 
2650
@node Chars
2651
@subsubsection Characters
2652
 
2653
@cindex single character constant
2654
@cindex character, single
2655
@cindex constant, single character
2656
A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2657
followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
2658
to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2659
must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2660
@code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2661
grave accent.  A newline
2662
@ifclear GENERIC
2663
@ifclear abnormal-separator
2664
(or semicolon @samp{;})
2665
@end ifclear
2666
@ifset abnormal-separator
2667
@ifset H8
2668
(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2669
Renesas SH)
2670
@end ifset
2671
@end ifset
2672
@end ifclear
2673
immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2674
and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
2675
constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2676
that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2677
@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2678
 
2679
@node Numbers
2680
@subsection Number Constants
2681
 
2682
@cindex constants, number
2683
@cindex number constants
2684
@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2685
are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2686
would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
2687
integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
2688
are floating point numbers, described below.
2689
 
2690
@menu
2691
* Integers::                    Integers
2692
* Bignums::                     Bignums
2693
* Flonums::                     Flonums
2694
@ifclear GENERIC
2695
@ifset I960
2696
* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
2697
@end ifset
2698
@end ifclear
2699
@end menu
2700
 
2701
@node Integers
2702
@subsubsection Integers
2703
@cindex integers
2704
@cindex constants, integer
2705
 
2706
@cindex binary integers
2707
@cindex integers, binary
2708
A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2709
the binary digits @samp{01}.
2710
 
2711
@cindex octal integers
2712
@cindex integers, octal
2713
An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2714
digits (@samp{01234567}).
2715
 
2716
@cindex decimal integers
2717
@cindex integers, decimal
2718
A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2719
more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2720
 
2721
@cindex hexadecimal integers
2722
@cindex integers, hexadecimal
2723
A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2724
more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2725
 
2726
Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
2727
the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2728
(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2729
 
2730
@node Bignums
2731
@subsubsection Bignums
2732
 
2733
@cindex bignums
2734
@cindex constants, bignum
2735
A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2736
except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2737
represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
2738
integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2739
 
2740
@node Flonums
2741
@subsubsection Flonums
2742
@cindex flonums
2743
@cindex floating point numbers
2744
@cindex constants, floating point
2745
 
2746
@cindex precision, floating point
2747
A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
2748
indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2749
@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2750
sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
2751
to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2752
portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2753
 
2754
A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2755
@itemize @bullet
2756
@item
2757
The digit @samp{0}.
2758
@ifset HPPA
2759
(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2760
@end ifset
2761
 
2762
@item
2763
A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2764
@ifset GENERIC
2765
@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
2766
@ignore
2767
@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2768
(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
2769
4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2770
@end ignore
2771
 
2772
On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2773
and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2774
one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2775
 
2776
On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2777
(in upper or lower case).
2778
 
2779
On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2780
one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2781
 
2782
On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2783
@end ifset
2784
@ifclear GENERIC
2785
@ifset ARC
2786
One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2787
@end ifset
2788
@ifset H8
2789
One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2790
@end ifset
2791
@ifset HPPA
2792
The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2793
@end ifset
2794
@ifset I960
2795
One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2796
@end ifset
2797
@end ifclear
2798
 
2799
@item
2800
An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2801
 
2802
@item
2803
An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2804
 
2805
@item
2806
An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2807
or more decimal digits.
2808
 
2809
@item
2810
An optional exponent, consisting of:
2811
 
2812
@itemize @bullet
2813
@item
2814
An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2815
@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2816
@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2817
@item
2818
Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2819
@item
2820
One or more decimal digits.
2821
@end itemize
2822
 
2823
@end itemize
2824
 
2825
At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2826
present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2827
 
2828
@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
2829
independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2830
@command{@value{AS}}.
2831
 
2832
@ifclear GENERIC
2833
@ifset I960
2834
@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2835
@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2836
@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2837
@node Bit Fields
2838
@subsubsection Bit Fields
2839
 
2840
@cindex bit fields
2841
@cindex constants, bit field
2842
You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2843
Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2844
@example
2845
@var{mask}:@var{value}
2846
@end example
2847
@noindent
2848
@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2849
@var{value}.
2850
 
2851
The resulting number is then packed
2852
@ifset GENERIC
2853
@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2854
(in host-dependent byte order)
2855
@end ifset
2856
into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2857
bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2858
requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2859
more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2860
least significant digits.@refill
2861
 
2862
The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2863
@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2864
@end ifset
2865
@end ifclear
2866
 
2867
@node Sections
2868
@chapter Sections and Relocation
2869
@cindex sections
2870
@cindex relocation
2871
 
2872
@menu
2873
* Secs Background::             Background
2874
* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
2875
* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
2876
* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
2877
* bss::                         bss Section
2878
@end menu
2879
 
2880
@node Secs Background
2881
@section Background
2882
 
2883
Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2884
``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2885
For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2886
 
2887
@cindex linker, and assembler
2888
@cindex assembler, and linker
2889
The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2890
combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
2891
emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2892
@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2893
different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
2894
oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2895
sections.
2896
 
2897
@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2898
addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2899
units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2900
within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
2901
run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
2902
the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2903
the proper run-time addresses.
2904
@ifset H8
2905
For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2906
@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2907
ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2908
@end ifset
2909
 
2910
@cindex standard assembler sections
2911
An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2912
of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2913
@dfn{bss} sections.
2914
 
2915
@ifset COFF-ELF
2916
@ifset GENERIC
2917
When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2918
@end ifset
2919
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2920
using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2921
If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2922
or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2923
@end ifset
2924
 
2925
@ifset HPPA
2926
@ifset GENERIC
2927
When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2928
@end ifset
2929
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2930
specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
2931
@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2932
(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2933
assembler directives.
2934
 
2935
@ifset SOM
2936
Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2937
text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
2938
is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2939
BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2940
@end ifset
2941
@end ifset
2942
 
2943
Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2944
data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2945
 
2946
@ifset HPPA
2947
When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2948
section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2949
@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2950
@end ifset
2951
 
2952
To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2953
relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2954
object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
2955
@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
2956
file is mentioned:
2957
@itemize @bullet
2958
@item
2959
Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
2960
an address?
2961
@item
2962
How long (in bytes) is this reference?
2963
@item
2964
Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
2965
@display
2966
(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
2967
@end display
2968
@item
2969
Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
2970
@end itemize
2971
 
2972
@cindex addresses, format of
2973
@cindex section-relative addressing
2974
In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
2975
@display
2976
(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
2977
@end display
2978
@noindent
2979
Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
2980
nature.
2981
@ifset SOM
2982
(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
2983
symbol-relative instead.)
2984
@end ifset
2985
 
2986
In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
2987
@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
2988
 
2989
Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
2990
@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
2991
addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
2992
@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
2993
@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
2994
data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
2995
their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
2996
part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
2997
address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
2998
 
2999
The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
3000
address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3001
rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3002
Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3003
address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
3004
common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3005
time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3006
 
3007
By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3008
the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3009
sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
3010
customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3011
the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
3012
data and bss sections.
3013
 
3014
Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3015
use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3016
 
3017
@node Ld Sections
3018
@section Linker Sections
3019
@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3020
 
3021
@table @strong
3022
 
3023
@ifset COFF-ELF
3024
@cindex named sections
3025
@cindex sections, named
3026
@item named sections
3027
@end ifset
3028
@ifset aout-bout
3029
@cindex text section
3030
@cindex data section
3031
@itemx text section
3032
@itemx data section
3033
@end ifset
3034
These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3035
separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
3036
true of another.
3037
@c @ifset aout-bout
3038
When the program is running, however, it is
3039
customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
3040
text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3041
instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
3042
program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3043
in the data section.
3044
@c @end ifset
3045
 
3046
@cindex bss section
3047
@item bss section
3048
This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
3049
is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
3050
each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3051
out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3052
bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
3053
those explicit zeros from object files.
3054
 
3055
@cindex absolute section
3056
@item absolute section
3057
Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3058
This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3059
not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
3060
addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3061
 
3062
@cindex undefined section
3063
@item undefined section
3064
This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3065
the preceding sections.
3066
@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3067
@end table
3068
 
3069
@cindex relocation example
3070
An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3071
@ifset COFF-ELF
3072
The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3073
@end ifset
3074
Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3075
 
3076
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3077
@ifnottex
3078
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3079
@smallexample
3080
                      +-----+----+--+
3081
partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3082
                      +-----+----+--+
3083
 
3084
                      text   data bss
3085
                      seg.   seg. seg.
3086
 
3087
                      +---+---+---+
3088
partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3089
                      +---+---+---+
3090
 
3091
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3092
linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3093
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3094
 
3095
    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3096
@end smallexample
3097
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3098
@end ifnottex
3099
@need 5000
3100
@tex
3101
\bigskip
3102
\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3103
\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3104
\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3105
 
3106
\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3107
\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3108
\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3109
 
3110
\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3111
\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3112
\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3113
ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3114
DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3115
 
3116
\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3117
\line{0\dots\hfil}
3118
 
3119
@end tex
3120
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3121
 
3122
@node As Sections
3123
@section Assembler Internal Sections
3124
 
3125
@cindex internal assembler sections
3126
@cindex sections in messages, internal
3127
These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3128
have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3129
sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3130
warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3131
meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3132
value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3133
section-relative address.
3134
 
3135
@table @b
3136
@cindex assembler internal logic error
3137
@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3138
An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3139
bug in the assembler.
3140
 
3141
@cindex expr (internal section)
3142
@item expr section
3143
The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3144
symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3145
it in the expr section.
3146
@c FIXME item debug
3147
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3148
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3149
@c FIXME item register
3150
@end table
3151
 
3152
@node Sub-Sections
3153
@section Sub-Sections
3154
 
3155
@cindex numbered subsections
3156
@cindex grouping data
3157
@ifset aout-bout
3158
Assembled bytes
3159
@ifset COFF-ELF
3160
conventionally
3161
@end ifset
3162
fall into two sections: text and data.
3163
@end ifset
3164
You may have separate groups of
3165
@ifset GENERIC
3166
data in named sections
3167
@end ifset
3168
@ifclear GENERIC
3169
@ifclear aout-bout
3170
data in named sections
3171
@end ifclear
3172
@ifset aout-bout
3173
text or data
3174
@end ifset
3175
@end ifclear
3176
that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3177
are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3178
use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3179
numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3180
same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3181
subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3182
section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3183
assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3184
section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3185
constants being output.
3186
 
3187
Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3188
goes in subsection number zero.
3189
 
3190
@ifset GENERIC
3191
Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3192
(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3193
of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3194
@end ifset
3195
@ifclear GENERIC
3196
@ifset H8
3197
On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3198
boundary (two bytes).
3199
The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3200
@end ifset
3201
@ifset I960
3202
@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3203
@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3204
@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3205
@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3206
@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3207
@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3208
@end ifset
3209
@end ifclear
3210
 
3211
Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3212
to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3213
The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3214
other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3215
They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3216
data subsections as a data section.
3217
 
3218
To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3219
into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3220
@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3221
@ifset COFF
3222
@ifset GENERIC
3223
When generating COFF output, you
3224
@end ifset
3225
@ifclear GENERIC
3226
You
3227
@end ifclear
3228
can also use an extra subsection
3229
argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3230
@var{expression}}.
3231
@end ifset
3232
@ifset ELF
3233
@ifset GENERIC
3234
When generating ELF output, you
3235
@end ifset
3236
@ifclear GENERIC
3237
You
3238
@end ifclear
3239
can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3240
to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3241
@end ifset
3242
@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3243
(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3244
is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3245
begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3246
@smallexample
3247
.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3248
.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3249
.text 1
3250
.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3251
.data 0
3252
.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3253
.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3254
.text 0
3255
.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3256
.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3257
@end smallexample
3258
 
3259
Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3260
assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3261
restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3262
counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3263
@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3264
current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3265
assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3266
 
3267
@node bss
3268
@section bss Section
3269
 
3270
@cindex bss section
3271
@cindex common variable storage
3272
The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3273
You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3274
not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3275
your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3276
section are zeroed bytes.
3277
 
3278
The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3279
@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3280
 
3281
The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3282
another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3283
 
3284
@ifset GENERIC
3285
When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3286
COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3287
see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3288
section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3289
@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3290
@end ifset
3291
 
3292
@node Symbols
3293
@chapter Symbols
3294
 
3295
@cindex symbols
3296
Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3297
things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3298
to debug.
3299
 
3300
@quotation
3301
@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3302
@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3303
the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3304
@end quotation
3305
 
3306
@menu
3307
* Labels::                      Labels
3308
* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3309
* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3310
* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3311
* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3312
@end menu
3313
 
3314
@node Labels
3315
@section Labels
3316
 
3317
@cindex labels
3318
A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3319
@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3320
active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3321
operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3322
different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3323
definitions.
3324
 
3325
@ifset HPPA
3326
On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3327
colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3328
a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3329
provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3330
@end ifset
3331
 
3332
@node Setting Symbols
3333
@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3334
 
3335
@cindex assigning values to symbols
3336
@cindex symbol values, assigning
3337
A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3338
by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3339
(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3340
directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3341
equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3342
@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3343
 
3344
@ifset Blackfin
3345
Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3346
@end ifset
3347
 
3348
@node Symbol Names
3349
@section Symbol Names
3350
 
3351
@cindex symbol names
3352
@cindex names, symbol
3353
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3354
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3355
machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3356
noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3357
string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3358
particular target machine), and underscores.
3359
@end ifclear
3360
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3361
@ifset H8
3362
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3363
Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3364
character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3365
on the H8/300), and underscores.
3366
@end ifset
3367
@end ifset
3368
 
3369
Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3370
than @code{Foo}.
3371
 
3372
Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3373
refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3374
in a program.
3375
 
3376
@subheading Local Symbol Names
3377
 
3378
@cindex local symbol names
3379
@cindex symbol names, local
3380
A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3381
By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3382
@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3383
set of local label prefixes.
3384
@ifset HPPA
3385
On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3386
@end ifset
3387
 
3388
Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3389
normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3390
You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3391
@option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3392
 
3393
@subheading Local Labels
3394
 
3395
@cindex local labels
3396
@cindex temporary symbol names
3397
@cindex symbol names, temporary
3398
Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3399
They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3400
the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3401
To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3402
represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent previous
3403
definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3404
you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3405
@samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3406
for ``forwards''.
3407
 
3408
There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3409
too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3410
the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3411
defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3412
definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3413
noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3414
implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3415
 
3416
Here is an example:
3417
 
3418
@smallexample
3419
1:        branch 1f
3420
2:        branch 1b
3421
1:        branch 2f
3422
2:        branch 1b
3423
@end smallexample
3424
 
3425
Which is the equivalent of:
3426
 
3427
@smallexample
3428
label_1:  branch label_3
3429
label_2:  branch label_1
3430
label_3:  branch label_4
3431
label_4:  branch label_3
3432
@end smallexample
3433
 
3434
Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3435
transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3436
The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3437
are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3438
these parts:
3439
 
3440
@table @code
3441
@item @emph{local label prefix}
3442
All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3443
Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3444
that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3445
used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3446
@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3447
object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3448
you may use them in debugging.
3449
 
3450
@item @var{number}
3451
This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3452
label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3453
 
3454
@item @kbd{C-B}
3455
This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3456
of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3457
 
3458
@item @emph{ordinal number}
3459
This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3460
@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3461
number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3462
the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3463
@end table
3464
 
3465
So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3466
the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3467
 
3468
@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3469
@cindex dollar local symbols
3470
 
3471
@code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3472
dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3473
soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a small
3474
region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3475
scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3476
the same local label.
3477
 
3478
Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3479
except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3480
@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3481
 
3482
They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3483
names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3484
to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3485
@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3486
 
3487
@node Dot
3488
@section The Special Dot Symbol
3489
 
3490
@cindex dot (symbol)
3491
@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3492
@cindex current address
3493
@cindex location counter
3494
The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3495
@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3496
.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3497
Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3498
directive.
3499
@ifclear no-space-dir
3500
Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3501
@samp{.space 4}.
3502
@end ifclear
3503
 
3504
@node Symbol Attributes
3505
@section Symbol Attributes
3506
 
3507
@cindex symbol attributes
3508
@cindex attributes, symbol
3509
Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3510
``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3511
attributes.
3512
@ifset INTERNALS
3513
The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3514
@end ifset
3515
 
3516
If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3517
all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3518
symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3519
would want.
3520
 
3521
@menu
3522
* Symbol Value::                Value
3523
* Symbol Type::                 Type
3524
@ifset aout-bout
3525
@ifset GENERIC
3526
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3527
@end ifset
3528
@ifclear GENERIC
3529
@ifclear BOUT
3530
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3531
@end ifclear
3532
@ifset BOUT
3533
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3534
@end ifset
3535
@end ifclear
3536
@end ifset
3537
@ifset COFF
3538
* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3539
@end ifset
3540
@ifset SOM
3541
* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3542
@end ifset
3543
@end menu
3544
 
3545
@node Symbol Value
3546
@subsection Value
3547
 
3548
@cindex value of a symbol
3549
@cindex symbol value
3550
The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3551
location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3552
number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3553
Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3554
as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3555
symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3556
called absolute.
3557
 
3558
The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
3559
 
3560
@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3561
same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3562
name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3563
common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3564
bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3565
allocated storage.
3566
 
3567
@node Symbol Type
3568
@subsection Type
3569
 
3570
@cindex type of a symbol
3571
@cindex symbol type
3572
The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3573
information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3574
(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
3575
format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3576
 
3577
@ifset aout-bout
3578
@ifclear GENERIC
3579
@ifset BOUT
3580
@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
3581
@c better if it were available outside examples.
3582
@need 1000
3583
@node a.out Symbols
3584
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3585
 
3586
@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3587
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3588
These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3589
one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3590
@code{b.out}.
3591
 
3592
@end ifset
3593
@ifclear BOUT
3594
@node a.out Symbols
3595
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3596
 
3597
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3598
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3599
 
3600
@end ifclear
3601
@end ifclear
3602
@ifset GENERIC
3603
@node a.out Symbols
3604
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3605
 
3606
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3607
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3608
 
3609
@end ifset
3610
@menu
3611
* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
3612
* Symbol Other::                Other
3613
@end menu
3614
 
3615
@node Symbol Desc
3616
@subsubsection Descriptor
3617
 
3618
@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3619
This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
3620
descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3621
(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
3622
@command{@value{AS}}.
3623
 
3624
@node Symbol Other
3625
@subsubsection Other
3626
 
3627
@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3628
This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3629
@end ifset
3630
 
3631
@ifset COFF
3632
@node COFF Symbols
3633
@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3634
 
3635
@cindex COFF symbol attributes
3636
@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3637
 
3638
The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3639
like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3640
@code{.endef} directives.
3641
 
3642
@subsubsection Primary Attributes
3643
 
3644
@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3645
The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3646
respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3647
 
3648
@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3649
 
3650
@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3651
The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3652
@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3653
table information for COFF.
3654
@end ifset
3655
 
3656
@ifset SOM
3657
@node SOM Symbols
3658
@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3659
 
3660
@cindex SOM symbol attributes
3661
@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3662
 
3663
The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3664
the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3665
 
3666
The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3667
Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3668
@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3669
@end ifset
3670
 
3671
@node Expressions
3672
@chapter Expressions
3673
 
3674
@cindex expressions
3675
@cindex addresses
3676
@cindex numeric values
3677
An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3678
Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3679
 
3680
The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3681
a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3682
enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3683
section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3684
the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3685
@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3686
 
3687
@menu
3688
* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
3689
* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
3690
@end menu
3691
 
3692
@node Empty Exprs
3693
@section Empty Expressions
3694
 
3695
@cindex empty expressions
3696
@cindex expressions, empty
3697
An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3698
Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3699
expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
3700
is compatible with other assemblers.
3701
 
3702
@node Integer Exprs
3703
@section Integer Expressions
3704
 
3705
@cindex integer expressions
3706
@cindex expressions, integer
3707
An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3708
by @emph{operators}.
3709
 
3710
@menu
3711
* Arguments::                   Arguments
3712
* Operators::                   Operators
3713
* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
3714
* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
3715
@end menu
3716
 
3717
@node Arguments
3718
@subsection Arguments
3719
 
3720
@cindex expression arguments
3721
@cindex arguments in expressions
3722
@cindex operands in expressions
3723
@cindex arithmetic operands
3724
@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
3725
contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
3726
this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3727
the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3728
expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3729
instruction operands.
3730
 
3731
Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3732
@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3733
or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3734
integer.
3735
 
3736
Numbers are usually integers.
3737
 
3738
A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
3739
that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3740
these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
3741
instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3742
assemblers.
3743
 
3744
@cindex subexpressions
3745
Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3746
expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3747
operator followed by an argument.
3748
 
3749
@node Operators
3750
@subsection Operators
3751
 
3752
@cindex operators, in expressions
3753
@cindex arithmetic functions
3754
@cindex functions, in expressions
3755
@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
3756
operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
3757
between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3758
whitespace.
3759
 
3760
@node Prefix Ops
3761
@subsection Prefix Operator
3762
 
3763
@cindex prefix operators
3764
@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
3765
one argument, which must be absolute.
3766
 
3767
@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3768
@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3769
@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3770
@tex
3771
\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3772
@end tex
3773
 
3774
@table @code
3775
@item -
3776
@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
3777
@item ~
3778
@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
3779
@end table
3780
 
3781
@tex
3782
\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3783
@end tex
3784
 
3785
@node Infix Ops
3786
@subsection Infix Operators
3787
 
3788
@cindex infix operators
3789
@cindex operators, permitted arguments
3790
@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
3791
have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3792
to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3793
absolute, and the result is absolute.
3794
 
3795
@enumerate
3796
@cindex operator precedence
3797
@cindex precedence of operators
3798
 
3799
@item
3800
Highest Precedence
3801
 
3802
@table @code
3803
@item *
3804
@dfn{Multiplication}.
3805
 
3806
@item /
3807
@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3808
 
3809
@item %
3810
@dfn{Remainder}.
3811
 
3812
@item <<
3813
@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3814
 
3815
@item >>
3816
@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3817
@end table
3818
 
3819
@item
3820
Intermediate precedence
3821
 
3822
@table @code
3823
@item |
3824
 
3825
@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3826
 
3827
@item &
3828
@dfn{Bitwise And}.
3829
 
3830
@item ^
3831
@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3832
 
3833
@item !
3834
@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3835
@end table
3836
 
3837
@item
3838
Low Precedence
3839
 
3840
@table @code
3841
@cindex addition, permitted arguments
3842
@cindex plus, permitted arguments
3843
@cindex arguments for addition
3844
@item +
3845
@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3846
the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
3847
sections.
3848
 
3849
@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3850
@cindex minus, permitted arguments
3851
@cindex arguments for subtraction
3852
@item -
3853
@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
3854
result has the section of the left argument.
3855
If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3856
You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3857
@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3858
 
3859
@cindex comparison expressions
3860
@cindex expressions, comparison
3861
@item  ==
3862
@dfn{Is Equal To}
3863
@item <>
3864
@itemx !=
3865
@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3866
@item <
3867
@dfn{Is Less Than}
3868
@item >
3869
@dfn{Is Greater Than}
3870
@item >=
3871
@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3872
@item <=
3873
@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3874
 
3875
The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
3876
value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
3877
perform signed comparisons.
3878
@end table
3879
 
3880
@item Lowest Precedence
3881
 
3882
@table @code
3883
@item &&
3884
@dfn{Logical And}.
3885
 
3886
@item ||
3887
@dfn{Logical Or}.
3888
 
3889
These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3890
expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3891
value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
3892
or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3893
 
3894
@end table
3895
@end enumerate
3896
 
3897
In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3898
address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3899
 
3900
@node Pseudo Ops
3901
@chapter Assembler Directives
3902
 
3903
@cindex directives, machine independent
3904
@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3905
@cindex machine independent directives
3906
All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3907
The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3908
 
3909
This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3910
target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3911
@ifset GENERIC
3912
Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3913
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3914
@end ifset
3915
@ifclear GENERIC
3916
@ifset machine-directives
3917
@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3918
@end ifset
3919
@end ifclear
3920
 
3921
@menu
3922
* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
3923
@ifset COFF
3924
* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
3925
@end ifset
3926
 
3927
* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3928
* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
3929
* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3930
* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3931
* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3932
* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3933
* CFI directives::              @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3934
* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3935
* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3936
@ifset COFF
3937
* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
3938
@end ifset
3939
@ifset aout-bout
3940
* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3941
@end ifset
3942
@ifset COFF
3943
* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
3944
@end ifset
3945
 
3946
* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3947
* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
3948
* Else::                        @code{.else}
3949
* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
3950
* End::                         @code{.end}
3951
@ifset COFF
3952
* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
3953
@end ifset
3954
 
3955
* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
3956
* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
3957
* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3958
* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3959
* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3960
* Err::                         @code{.err}
3961
* Error::                       @code{.error @var{string}}
3962
* Exitm::                       @code{.exitm}
3963
* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
3964
* Fail::                        @code{.fail}
3965
* File::                        @code{.file}
3966
* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
3967
* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
3968
* Func::                        @code{.func}
3969
* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
3970
@ifset ELF
3971
* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
3972
* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
3973
@end ifset
3974
 
3975
* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
3976
* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
3977
* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
3978
* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
3979
* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
3980
* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
3981
@ifset ELF
3982
* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
3983
@end ifset
3984
 
3985
* Irp::                         @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3986
* Irpc::                        @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3987
* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
3988
* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
3989
@ifclear no-line-dir
3990
* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
3991
@end ifclear
3992
 
3993
* Linkonce::                    @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
3994
* List::                        @code{.list}
3995
* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
3996
* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
3997
* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
3998
@ifset ELF
3999
* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
4000
@end ifset
4001
 
4002
* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4003
@ignore
4004
* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4005
@end ignore
4006
 
4007
* Macro::                       @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4008
* MRI::                         @code{.mri @var{val}}
4009
* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
4010
* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
4011
* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4012
* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4013
* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4014
@ifset ELF
4015
* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
4016
* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
4017
@end ifset
4018
 
4019
* Print::                       @code{.print @var{string}}
4020
@ifset ELF
4021
* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
4022
@end ifset
4023
 
4024
* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4025
* Purgem::                      @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4026
@ifset ELF
4027
* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4028
@end ifset
4029
 
4030
* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4031
* Reloc::                       @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4032
* Rept::                        @code{.rept @var{count}}
4033
* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4034
@ifset COFF
4035
* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
4036
@end ifset
4037
@ifset COFF-ELF
4038
* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4039
@end ifset
4040
 
4041
* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4042
* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4043
* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4044
@ifset COFF-ELF
4045
* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4046
@end ifset
4047
@ifclear no-space-dir
4048
* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4049
@end ifclear
4050
 
4051
* Sleb128::                     @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4052
@ifclear no-space-dir
4053
* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4054
@end ifclear
4055
@ifset have-stabs
4056
* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4057
@end ifset
4058
 
4059
* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4060
* Struct::                      @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4061
@ifset ELF
4062
* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
4063
* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4064
@end ifset
4065
 
4066
@ifset COFF
4067
* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4068
@end ifset
4069
 
4070
* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4071
* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4072
@ifset COFF-ELF
4073
* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4074
@end ifset
4075
 
4076
* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4077
@ifset COFF
4078
* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4079
@end ifset
4080
 
4081
@ifset ELF
4082
* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4083
* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4084
* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4085
@end ifset
4086
 
4087
* Warning::                     @code{.warning @var{string}}
4088
* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4089
* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4090
* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4091
* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4092
@end menu
4093
 
4094
@node Abort
4095
@section @code{.abort}
4096
 
4097
@cindex @code{abort} directive
4098
@cindex stopping the assembly
4099
This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4100
compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4101
assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4102
of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4103
quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4104
 
4105
@ifset COFF
4106
@node ABORT (COFF)
4107
@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4108
 
4109
@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4110
When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4111
synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4112
 
4113
@ifset BOUT
4114
When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4115
but ignores it.
4116
@end ifset
4117
@end ifset
4118
 
4119
@node Align
4120
@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4121
 
4122
@cindex padding the location counter
4123
@cindex @code{align} directive
4124
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4125
boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4126
required, as described below.
4127
 
4128
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4129
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4130
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4131
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4132
with no-op instructions.
4133
 
4134
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4135
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4136
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4137
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4138
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4139
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4140
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4141
 
4142
The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4143
For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4144
s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4145
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4146
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4147
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4148
first expression is the alignment request in words.
4149
 
4150
For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4151
strongarm, it is the
4152
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4153
advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4154
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4155
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4156
 
4157
This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4158
native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4159
GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4160
described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4161
architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4162
 
4163
@node Altmacro
4164
@section @code{.altmacro}
4165
Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4166
 
4167
@ftable @code
4168
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4169
One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4170
generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4171
replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4172
replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4173
separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4174
define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4175
 
4176
@item String delimiters
4177
You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4178
@code{"@var{string}"}:
4179
 
4180
@table @code
4181
@item '@var{string}'
4182
You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4183
 
4184
@item <@var{string}>
4185
You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4186
@end table
4187
 
4188
@item single-character string escape
4189
To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4190
character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4191
character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4192
write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4193
 
4194
@item Expression results as strings
4195
You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4196
and use the result as a string.
4197
@end ftable
4198
 
4199
@node Ascii
4200
@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4201
 
4202
@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4203
@cindex string literals
4204
@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4205
separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4206
trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4207
 
4208
@node Asciz
4209
@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4210
 
4211
@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4212
@cindex zero-terminated strings
4213
@cindex null-terminated strings
4214
@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4215
a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4216
 
4217
@node Balign
4218
@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4219
 
4220
@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4221
@cindex @code{balign} directive
4222
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4223
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4224
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4225
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4226
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4227
 
4228
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4229
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4230
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4231
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4232
with no-op instructions.
4233
 
4234
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4235
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4236
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4237
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4238
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4239
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4240
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4241
 
4242
@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4243
@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4244
The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4245
@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4246
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4247
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
4248
4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4249
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4250
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4251
undefined.
4252
 
4253
@node Byte
4254
@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4255
 
4256
@cindex @code{byte} directive
4257
@cindex integers, one byte
4258
@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4259
Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4260
 
4261
@node CFI directives
4262
@section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4263
@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4264
@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4265
should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4266
If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4267
if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4268
To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4269
directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4270
 
4271
@section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4272
@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4273
@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4274
should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4275
data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4276
@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4277
 
4278
Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4279
it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4280
 
4281
@section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4282
@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4283
@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4284
unwind entry previously opened by
4285
@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4286
 
4287
@section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4288
@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4289
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4290
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4291
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4292
a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4293
the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4294
can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4295
The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4296
no personality routine.
4297
 
4298
@section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4299
@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4300
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4301
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4302
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4303
or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4304
no LSDA.
4305
 
4306
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4307
@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4308
address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4309
 
4310
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4311
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4312
now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4313
remains the same.
4314
 
4315
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4316
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4317
remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4318
absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4319
CFA address.
4320
 
4321
@section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4322
Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4323
value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4324
 
4325
@section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4326
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4327
CFA.
4328
 
4329
@section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4330
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4331
the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4332
using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4333
This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4334
code it's annotating.
4335
 
4336
@section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4337
Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4338
 
4339
@section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4340
@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4341
same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4342
instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4343
 
4344
@section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4345
From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4346
 
4347
@section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4348
Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4349
i.e. no restoration needed.
4350
 
4351
@section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4352
First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4353
then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4354
everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4355
the previous saved state.
4356
 
4357
@section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4358
Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4359
directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4360
 
4361
@section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4362
Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4363
 
4364
@section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4365
SPARC register window has been saved.
4366
 
4367
@section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4368
Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4369
might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4370
opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4371
 
4372
@section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4373
The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4374
will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4375
description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4376
 
4377
The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4378
limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4379
mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4380
by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4381
or another register.
4382
 
4383
@node Comm
4384
@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4385
 
4386
@cindex @code{comm} directive
4387
@cindex symbol, common
4388
@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4389
common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4390
of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4391
definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4392
allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4393
absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4394
the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4395
using the largest size.
4396
 
4397
@ifset COFF-ELF
4398
When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4399
an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4400
specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4401
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4402
as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4403
boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4404
power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4405
common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4406
alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4407
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4408
maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4409
is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4410
@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4411
multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4412
It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4413
(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4414
@end ifset
4415
 
4416
@ifset HPPA
4417
The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4418
@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4419
@end ifset
4420
 
4421
@node Data
4422
@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4423
 
4424
@cindex @code{data} directive
4425
@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4426
end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4427
absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4428
to zero.
4429
 
4430
@ifset COFF
4431
@node Def
4432
@section @code{.def @var{name}}
4433
 
4434
@cindex @code{def} directive
4435
@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4436
@cindex debugging COFF symbols
4437
Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4438
definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4439
@ifset BOUT
4440
 
4441
This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4442
format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4443
but ignored.
4444
@end ifset
4445
@end ifset
4446
 
4447
@ifset aout-bout
4448
@node Desc
4449
@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4450
 
4451
@cindex @code{desc} directive
4452
@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4453
@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4454
This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4455
to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4456
 
4457
@ifset COFF
4458
The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4459
configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4460
object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4461
it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4462
@end ifset
4463
@end ifset
4464
 
4465
@ifset COFF
4466
@node Dim
4467
@section @code{.dim}
4468
 
4469
@cindex @code{dim} directive
4470
@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4471
@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4472
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4473
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
4474
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4475
@ifset BOUT
4476
 
4477
@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4478
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4479
ignores it.
4480
@end ifset
4481
@end ifset
4482
 
4483
@node Double
4484
@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4485
 
4486
@cindex @code{double} directive
4487
@cindex floating point numbers (double)
4488
@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4489
assembles floating point numbers.
4490
@ifset GENERIC
4491
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4492
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4493
@end ifset
4494
@ifclear GENERIC
4495
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4496
On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4497
in @sc{ieee} format.
4498
@end ifset
4499
@end ifclear
4500
 
4501
@node Eject
4502
@section @code{.eject}
4503
 
4504
@cindex @code{eject} directive
4505
@cindex new page, in listings
4506
@cindex page, in listings
4507
@cindex listing control: new page
4508
Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4509
 
4510
@node Else
4511
@section @code{.else}
4512
 
4513
@cindex @code{else} directive
4514
@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4515
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
4516
of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4517
was false.
4518
 
4519
@node Elseif
4520
@section @code{.elseif}
4521
 
4522
@cindex @code{elseif} directive
4523
@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4524
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
4525
@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4526
 
4527
@node End
4528
@section @code{.end}
4529
 
4530
@cindex @code{end} directive
4531
@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
4532
process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4533
 
4534
@ifset COFF
4535
@node Endef
4536
@section @code{.endef}
4537
 
4538
@cindex @code{endef} directive
4539
This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4540
@code{.def}.
4541
@ifset BOUT
4542
 
4543
@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4544
@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4545
directive but ignores it.
4546
@end ifset
4547
@end ifset
4548
 
4549
@node Endfunc
4550
@section @code{.endfunc}
4551
@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4552
@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4553
 
4554
@node Endif
4555
@section @code{.endif}
4556
 
4557
@cindex @code{endif} directive
4558
@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4559
it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4560
conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4561
 
4562
@node Equ
4563
@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4564
 
4565
@cindex @code{equ} directive
4566
@cindex assigning values to symbols
4567
@cindex symbols, assigning values to
4568
This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4569
It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4570
 
4571
@ifset HPPA
4572
The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4573
@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4574
@end ifset
4575
 
4576
@ifset Z80
4577
The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4578
@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4579
On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4580
but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4581
Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4582
@end ifset
4583
 
4584
@node Equiv
4585
@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4586
@cindex @code{equiv} directive
4587
The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4588
the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
4589
symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4590
undefined.
4591
 
4592
Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4593
@smallexample
4594
.ifdef SYM
4595
.err
4596
.endif
4597
.equ SYM,VAL
4598
@end smallexample
4599
plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4600
 
4601
@node Eqv
4602
@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4603
@cindex @code{eqv} directive
4604
The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4605
evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
4606
the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4607
value is taken.
4608
 
4609
@node Err
4610
@section @code{.err}
4611
@cindex @code{err} directive
4612
If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4613
message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4614
object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4615
 
4616
@node Error
4617
@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4618
@cindex error directive
4619
 
4620
Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4621
string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
4622
message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4623
@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4624
 
4625
@smallexample
4626
 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4627
@end smallexample
4628
 
4629
@node Exitm
4630
@section @code{.exitm}
4631
Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
4632
 
4633
@node Extern
4634
@section @code{.extern}
4635
 
4636
@cindex @code{extern} directive
4637
@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4638
with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
4639
all undefined symbols as external.
4640
 
4641
@node Fail
4642
@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4643
 
4644
@cindex @code{fail} directive
4645
Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4646
or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
4647
than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
4648
include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
4649
complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4650
 
4651
@node File
4652
@section @code{.file}
4653
@cindex @code{file} directive
4654
 
4655
@ifclear no-file-dir
4656
There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
4657
that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4658
@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
4659
 
4660
@subheading Default Version
4661
 
4662
@cindex logical file name
4663
@cindex file name, logical
4664
This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4665
are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
4666
 
4667
@smallexample
4668
.file @var{string}
4669
@end smallexample
4670
 
4671
@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
4672
recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4673
to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
4674
statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4675
old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4676
 
4677
@subheading DWARF2 Version
4678
@end ifclear
4679
 
4680
When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4681
to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
4682
 
4683
@smallexample
4684
.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4685
@end smallexample
4686
 
4687
The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4688
index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4689
literal.
4690
 
4691
The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4692
table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4693
information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4694
entries will have.
4695
 
4696
@node Fill
4697
@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4698
 
4699
@cindex @code{fill} directive
4700
@cindex writing patterns in memory
4701
@cindex patterns, writing in memory
4702
@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4703
This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
4704
may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4705
more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4706
other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4707
is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
4708
zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4709
byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4710
Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4711
@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
4712
compatible with other people's assemblers.
4713
 
4714
@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4715
If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4716
assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4717
@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4718
 
4719
@node Float
4720
@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4721
 
4722
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
4723
@cindex @code{float} directive
4724
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4725
has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4726
@ifset GENERIC
4727
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4728
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4729
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4730
@end ifset
4731
@ifclear GENERIC
4732
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4733
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4734
in @sc{ieee} format.
4735
@end ifset
4736
@end ifclear
4737
 
4738
@node Func
4739
@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4740
@cindex @code{func} directive
4741
@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4742
is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4743
Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4744
@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4745
prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4746
@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4747
All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4748
The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4749
 
4750
@node Global
4751
@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4752
 
4753
@cindex @code{global} directive
4754
@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4755
@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
4756
@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4757
other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
4758
@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4759
from another file linked into the same program.
4760
 
4761
Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4762
compatibility with other assemblers.
4763
 
4764
@ifset HPPA
4765
On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4766
partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4767
@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4768
@end ifset
4769
 
4770
@ifset ELF
4771
@node Gnu_attribute
4772
@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4773
Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
4774
 
4775
@node Hidden
4776
@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4777
 
4778
@cindex @code{hidden} directive
4779
@cindex visibility
4780
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4781
@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4782
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4783
 
4784
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4785
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4786
@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4787
Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4788
@end ifset
4789
 
4790
@node hword
4791
@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4792
 
4793
@cindex @code{hword} directive
4794
@cindex integers, 16-bit
4795
@cindex numbers, 16-bit
4796
@cindex sixteen bit integers
4797
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4798
a 16 bit number for each.
4799
 
4800
@ifset GENERIC
4801
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4802
architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4803
@end ifset
4804
@ifclear GENERIC
4805
@ifset W32
4806
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4807
@end ifset
4808
@ifset W16
4809
This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4810
@end ifset
4811
@end ifclear
4812
 
4813
@node Ident
4814
@section @code{.ident}
4815
 
4816
@cindex @code{ident} directive
4817
 
4818
This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
4819
behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
4820
a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4821
source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4822
for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4823
@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
4824
emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4825
 
4826
@node If
4827
@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4828
 
4829
@cindex conditional assembly
4830
@cindex @code{if} directive
4831
@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4832
considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4833
(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
4834
the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4835
(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4836
alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4837
If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4838
nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4839
 
4840
The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4841
@table @code
4842
@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4843
@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4844
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4845
has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4846
is considered to be undefined.
4847
 
4848
@cindex @code{ifb} directive
4849
@item .ifb @var{text}
4850
Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4851
 
4852
@cindex @code{ifc} directive
4853
@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4854
Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
4855
strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
4856
the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4857
end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
4858
string comparison is case sensitive.
4859
 
4860
@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4861
@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4862
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4863
 
4864
@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4865
@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4866
Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4867
 
4868
@cindex @code{ifge} directive
4869
@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4870
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4871
equal to zero.
4872
 
4873
@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4874
@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4875
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4876
 
4877
@cindex @code{ifle} directive
4878
@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4879
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4880
to zero.
4881
 
4882
@cindex @code{iflt} directive
4883
@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4884
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4885
 
4886
@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4887
@item .ifnb @var{text}
4888
Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4889
following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4890
 
4891
@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4892
@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4893
Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4894
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4895
 
4896
@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4897
@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4898
@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4899
@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
4900
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4901
has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
4902
which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
4903
 
4904
@cindex @code{ifne} directive
4905
@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
4906
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
4907
(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
4908
 
4909
@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
4910
@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
4911
Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4912
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4913
@end table
4914
 
4915
@node Incbin
4916
@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4917
 
4918
@cindex @code{incbin} directive
4919
@cindex binary files, including
4920
The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
4921
location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
4922
option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4923
around @var{file}.
4924
 
4925
The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
4926
@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
4927
read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
4928
responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
4929
after the @code{incbin} directive.
4930
 
4931
@node Include
4932
@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4933
 
4934
@cindex @code{include} directive
4935
@cindex supporting files, including
4936
@cindex files, including
4937
This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
4938
points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
4939
if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
4940
included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
4941
can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
4942
(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4943
around @var{file}.
4944
 
4945
@node Int
4946
@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4947
 
4948
@cindex @code{int} directive
4949
@cindex integers, 32-bit
4950
Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
4951
For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
4952
expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
4953
of target the assembly is for.
4954
 
4955
@ifclear GENERIC
4956
@ifset H8
4957
On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
4958
integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
4959
32-bit integers.
4960
@end ifset
4961
@end ifclear
4962
 
4963
@ifset ELF
4964
@node Internal
4965
@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
4966
 
4967
@cindex @code{internal} directive
4968
@cindex visibility
4969
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4970
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
4971
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4972
 
4973
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4974
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4975
@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
4976
(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
4977
processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
4978
@end ifset
4979
 
4980
@node Irp
4981
@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4982
 
4983
@cindex @code{irp} directive
4984
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
4985
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
4986
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
4987
set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
4988
@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
4989
@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
4990
sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
4991
 
4992
For example, assembling
4993
 
4994
@example
4995
        .irp    param,1,2,3
4996
        move    d\param,sp@@-
4997
        .endr
4998
@end example
4999
 
5000
is equivalent to assembling
5001
 
5002
@example
5003
        move    d1,sp@@-
5004
        move    d2,sp@@-
5005
        move    d3,sp@@-
5006
@end example
5007
 
5008
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5009
 
5010
@node Irpc
5011
@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5012
 
5013
@cindex @code{irpc} directive
5014
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5015
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5016
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
5017
@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5018
assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5019
assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
5020
@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5021
 
5022
For example, assembling
5023
 
5024
@example
5025
        .irpc    param,123
5026
        move    d\param,sp@@-
5027
        .endr
5028
@end example
5029
 
5030
is equivalent to assembling
5031
 
5032
@example
5033
        move    d1,sp@@-
5034
        move    d2,sp@@-
5035
        move    d3,sp@@-
5036
@end example
5037
 
5038
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5039
at @xref{Macro}.
5040
 
5041
@node Lcomm
5042
@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5043
 
5044
@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5045
@cindex local common symbols
5046
@cindex symbols, local common
5047
Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5048
denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5049
those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
5050
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
5051
is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5052
not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5053
 
5054
@ifset GENERIC
5055
Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
5056
argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5057
@end ifset
5058
 
5059
@ifset HPPA
5060
The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5061
@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5062
@end ifset
5063
 
5064
@node Lflags
5065
@section @code{.lflags}
5066
 
5067
@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5068
@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5069
assemblers, but ignores it.
5070
 
5071
@ifclear no-line-dir
5072
@node Line
5073
@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5074
 
5075
@cindex @code{line} directive
5076
@cindex logical line number
5077
@ifset aout-bout
5078
Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5079
expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5080
statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5081
reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5082
@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5083
for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5084
@end ifset
5085
 
5086
Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5087
@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5088
when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5089
were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5090
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5091
 
5092
Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5093
used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5094
debugging.
5095
@end ifclear
5096
 
5097
@node Linkonce
5098
@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5099
@cindex COMDAT
5100
@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5101
@cindex common sections
5102
Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5103
This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5104
but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5105
The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5106
Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5107
unique.
5108
 
5109
This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5110
writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5111
Executable format used on Windows NT.
5112
 
5113
The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5114
following strings.  For example:
5115
@smallexample
5116
.linkonce same_size
5117
@end smallexample
5118
Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5119
 
5120
@table @code
5121
@item discard
5122
Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5123
 
5124
@item one_only
5125
Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5126
 
5127
@item same_size
5128
Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5129
 
5130
@item same_contents
5131
Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5132
@end table
5133
 
5134
@node List
5135
@section @code{.list}
5136
 
5137
@cindex @code{list} directive
5138
@cindex listing control, turning on
5139
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5140
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5141
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5142
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5143
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5144
 
5145
By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5146
@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5147
the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5148
 
5149
@node Ln
5150
@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5151
 
5152
@cindex @code{ln} directive
5153
@ifclear no-line-dir
5154
@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5155
@end ifclear
5156
@ifset no-line-dir
5157
Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5158
must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5159
line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5160
statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5161
line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5162
@ifset BOUT
5163
 
5164
This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5165
configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5166
output format.
5167
@end ifset
5168
@end ifset
5169
 
5170
@node Loc
5171
@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5172
@cindex @code{loc} directive
5173
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5174
the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5175
number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5176
instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5177
arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5178
the row is added.
5179
 
5180
The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5181
 
5182
@table @code
5183
@item basic_block
5184
This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5185
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5186
 
5187
@item prologue_end
5188
This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5189
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5190
 
5191
@item epilogue_begin
5192
This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5193
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5194
 
5195
@item is_stmt @var{value}
5196
This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5197
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5198
either 0 or 1.
5199
 
5200
@item isa @var{value}
5201
This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5202
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5203
 
5204
@item discriminator @var{value}
5205
This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5206
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5207
 
5208
@end table
5209
 
5210
@node Loc_mark_labels
5211
@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5212
@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5213
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5214
the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5215
to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5216
register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5217
The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5218
this function respectively.
5219
 
5220
@ifset ELF
5221
@node Local
5222
@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5223
 
5224
@cindex @code{local} directive
5225
This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5226
the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5227
will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5228
they will be created.
5229
 
5230
For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5231
accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5232
the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5233
(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5234
@end ifset
5235
 
5236
@node Long
5237
@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5238
 
5239
@cindex @code{long} directive
5240
@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5241
 
5242
@ignore
5243
@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5244
@c what it really ought to do
5245
@node Lsym
5246
@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5247
 
5248
@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5249
@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5250
@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5251
the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5252
rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5253
the same as the expression value:
5254
@smallexample
5255
@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5256
@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5257
@var{value} = @var{expression}
5258
@end smallexample
5259
@noindent
5260
The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5261
@end ignore
5262
 
5263
@node Macro
5264
@section @code{.macro}
5265
 
5266
@cindex macros
5267
The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5268
generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5269
@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5270
 
5271
@example
5272
        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5273
        .long   \from
5274
        .if     \to-\from
5275
        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5276
        .endif
5277
        .endm
5278
@end example
5279
 
5280
@noindent
5281
With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5282
 
5283
@example
5284
        .long   0
5285
        .long   1
5286
        .long   2
5287
        .long   3
5288
        .long   4
5289
        .long   5
5290
@end example
5291
 
5292
@ftable @code
5293
@item .macro @var{macname}
5294
@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5295
@cindex @code{macro} directive
5296
Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5297
definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5298
separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5299
indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5300
@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5301
(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5302
macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5303
cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5304
subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5305
definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5306
 
5307
@table @code
5308
@item .macro comm
5309
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5310
arguments.
5311
 
5312
@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5313
@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5314
Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5315
which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5316
@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5317
 
5318
@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5319
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5320
arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5321
After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5322
@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5323
@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5324
,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5325
@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5326
 
5327
@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5328
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5329
arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5330
not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5331
will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5332
 
5333
When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5334
position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5335
@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5336
 
5337
@end table
5338
 
5339
Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5340
as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5341
occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5342
characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5343
(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5344
architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5345
character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5346
replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5347
construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5348
identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5349
this macro definition:
5350
 
5351
@example
5352
        .macro label l
5353
\l:
5354
        .endm
5355
@end example
5356
 
5357
might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5358
called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5359
assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5360
identifier.
5361
 
5362
Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5363
which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5364
for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5365
length specifier like this:
5366
 
5367
@example
5368
        .macro opcode base length
5369
        \base.\length
5370
        .endm
5371
@end example
5372
 
5373
and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5374
instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5375
interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5376
 
5377
There are several possible ways around this problem:
5378
 
5379
@table @code
5380
@item Insert white space
5381
If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5382
solution.  eg:
5383
 
5384
@example
5385
        .macro label l
5386
\l :
5387
        .endm
5388
@end example
5389
 
5390
@item Use @samp{\()}
5391
The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5392
the following text.  eg:
5393
 
5394
@example
5395
        .macro opcode base length
5396
        \base\().\length
5397
        .endm
5398
@end example
5399
 
5400
@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5401
In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5402
used as a separator.  eg:
5403
 
5404
@example
5405
        .altmacro
5406
        .macro label l
5407
l&:
5408
        .endm
5409
@end example
5410
@end table
5411
 
5412
Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5413
also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5414
and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5415
 
5416
@item .endm
5417
@cindex @code{endm} directive
5418
Mark the end of a macro definition.
5419
 
5420
@item .exitm
5421
@cindex @code{exitm} directive
5422
Exit early from the current macro definition.
5423
 
5424
@cindex number of macros executed
5425
@cindex macros, count executed
5426
@item \@@
5427
@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5428
executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5429
output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5430
 
5431
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5432
@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5433
macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5434
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5435
@end ftable
5436
 
5437
@node MRI
5438
@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5439
 
5440
@cindex @code{mri} directive
5441
@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5442
If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
5443
@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
5444
affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5445
of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5446
 
5447
@node Noaltmacro
5448
@section @code{.noaltmacro}
5449
Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
5450
 
5451
@node Nolist
5452
@section @code{.nolist}
5453
 
5454
@cindex @code{nolist} directive
5455
@cindex listing control, turning off
5456
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5457
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5458
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5459
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5460
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5461
 
5462
@node Octa
5463
@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5464
 
5465
@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
5466
@cindex @code{octa} directive
5467
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5468
@cindex sixteen byte integer
5469
This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
5470
bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5471
 
5472
The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5473
hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5474
 
5475
@node Org
5476
@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5477
 
5478
@cindex @code{org} directive
5479
@cindex location counter, advancing
5480
@cindex advancing location counter
5481
@cindex current address, advancing
5482
Advance the location counter of the current section to
5483
@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5484
expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
5485
you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5486
wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
5487
with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5488
@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5489
is the same as the current subsection.
5490
 
5491
@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5492
unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5493
backwards.
5494
 
5495
@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5496
@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5497
@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5498
Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5499
may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5500
a chance to share your improved assembler.
5501
 
5502
Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5503
to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
5504
people's assemblers.
5505
 
5506
When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5507
intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5508
absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5509
@var{fill} defaults to zero.
5510
 
5511
@node P2align
5512
@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5513
 
5514
@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5515
@cindex @code{p2align} directive
5516
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5517
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5518
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5519
advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5520
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
5521
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5522
 
5523
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5524
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
5525
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
5526
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5527
with no-op instructions.
5528
 
5529
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
5530
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5531
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5532
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
5533
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5534
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5535
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5536
 
5537
@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5538
@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5539
The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5540
@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5541
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5542
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
5543
2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
5544
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5545
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5546
undefined.
5547
 
5548
@ifset ELF
5549
@node PopSection
5550
@section @code{.popsection}
5551
 
5552
@cindex @code{popsection} directive
5553
@cindex Section Stack
5554
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5555
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5556
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5557
(@pxref{Previous}).
5558
 
5559
This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5560
section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
5561
stack.
5562
@end ifset
5563
 
5564
@ifset ELF
5565
@node Previous
5566
@section @code{.previous}
5567
 
5568
@cindex @code{previous} directive
5569
@cindex Section Stack
5570
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5571
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5572
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5573
(@pxref{PopSection}).
5574
 
5575
This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5576
referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
5577
@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5578
subsections).  For example:
5579
 
5580
@smallexample
5581
.section A
5582
 .subsection 1
5583
  .word 0x1234
5584
 .subsection 2
5585
  .word 0x5678
5586
.previous
5587
 .word 0x9abc
5588
@end smallexample
5589
 
5590
Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5591
section A.  Whilst:
5592
 
5593
@smallexample
5594
.section A
5595
.subsection 1
5596
  # Now in section A subsection 1
5597
  .word 0x1234
5598
.section B
5599
.subsection 0
5600
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5601
  .word 0x5678
5602
.subsection 1
5603
  # Now in section B subsection 1
5604
  .word 0x9abc
5605
.previous
5606
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5607
  .word 0xdef0
5608
@end smallexample
5609
 
5610
Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5611
section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5612
 
5613
In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5614
the top section on the section stack.
5615
@end ifset
5616
 
5617
@node Print
5618
@section @code{.print @var{string}}
5619
 
5620
@cindex @code{print} directive
5621
@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5622
assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5623
 
5624
@ifset ELF
5625
@node Protected
5626
@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5627
 
5628
@cindex @code{protected} directive
5629
@cindex visibility
5630
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5631
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5632
 
5633
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5634
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5635
@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5636
components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5637
component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5638
this.
5639
@end ifset
5640
 
5641
@node Psize
5642
@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5643
 
5644
@cindex @code{psize} directive
5645
@cindex listing control: paper size
5646
@cindex paper size, for listings
5647
Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5648
number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5649
 
5650
If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5651
of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5652
default width is 200 columns.
5653
 
5654
@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5655
lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5656
@code{.eject}).
5657
 
5658
If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5659
those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5660
 
5661
@node Purgem
5662
@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5663
 
5664
@cindex @code{purgem} directive
5665
Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5666
expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
5667
 
5668
@ifset ELF
5669
@node PushSection
5670
@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5671
 
5672
@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5673
@cindex Section Stack
5674
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5675
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5676
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5677
(@pxref{Previous}).
5678
 
5679
This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5680
top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5681
subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5682
@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5683
as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5684
@end ifset
5685
 
5686
@node Quad
5687
@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5688
 
5689
@cindex @code{quad} directive
5690
@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
5691
each bignum, it emits
5692
@ifclear bignum-16
5693
an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5694
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5695
@cindex eight-byte integer
5696
@cindex integer, 8-byte
5697
 
5698
The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5699
hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5700
@end ifclear
5701
@ifset bignum-16
5702
a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5703
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5704
@cindex sixteen-byte integer
5705
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5706
@end ifset
5707
 
5708
@node Reloc
5709
@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5710
 
5711
@cindex @code{reloc} directive
5712
Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5713
@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5714
the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5715
symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5716
@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5717
absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
5718
targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5719
relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5720
section.
5721
 
5722
@node Rept
5723
@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5724
 
5725
@cindex @code{rept} directive
5726
Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5727
@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5728
 
5729
For example, assembling
5730
 
5731
@example
5732
        .rept   3
5733
        .long   0
5734
        .endr
5735
@end example
5736
 
5737
is equivalent to assembling
5738
 
5739
@example
5740
        .long   0
5741
        .long   0
5742
        .long   0
5743
@end example
5744
 
5745
@node Sbttl
5746
@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5747
 
5748
@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5749
@cindex subtitles for listings
5750
@cindex listing control: subtitle
5751
Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5752
title line) when generating assembly listings.
5753
 
5754
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5755
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5756
 
5757
@ifset COFF
5758
@node Scl
5759
@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5760
 
5761
@cindex @code{scl} directive
5762
@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5763
@cindex COFF symbol storage class
5764
Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
5765
used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
5766
whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5767
symbolic debugging information.
5768
@ifset BOUT
5769
 
5770
The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5771
configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5772
accepts this directive but ignores it.
5773
@end ifset
5774
@end ifset
5775
 
5776
@ifset COFF-ELF
5777
@node Section
5778
@section @code{.section @var{name}}
5779
 
5780
@cindex named section
5781
Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5782
named @var{name}.
5783
 
5784
This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5785
named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5786
with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5787
 
5788
@ifset COFF
5789
@ifset ELF
5790
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5791
@subheading COFF Version
5792
@end ifset
5793
 
5794
@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5795
For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5796
ways:
5797
 
5798
@smallexample
5799
.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5800
.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5801
@end smallexample
5802
 
5803
If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5804
section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
5805
@table @code
5806
@item b
5807
bss section (uninitialized data)
5808
@item n
5809
section is not loaded
5810
@item w
5811
writable section
5812
@item d
5813
data section
5814
@item r
5815
read-only section
5816
@item x
5817
executable section
5818
@item s
5819
shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5820
@item a
5821
ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5822
@item y
5823
section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5824
@item 0-9
5825
single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5826
@end table
5827
 
5828
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5829
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5830
loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5831
from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5832
will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5833
 
5834
If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5835
taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5836
@end ifset
5837
 
5838
@ifset ELF
5839
@ifset COFF
5840
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5841
@subheading ELF Version
5842
@end ifset
5843
 
5844
@cindex Section Stack
5845
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5846
@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5847
(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5848
@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5849
 
5850
@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5851
For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5852
 
5853
@smallexample
5854
.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5855
@end smallexample
5856
 
5857
The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5858
combination of the following characters:
5859
@table @code
5860
@item a
5861
section is allocatable
5862
@item e
5863
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5864
@item w
5865
section is writable
5866
@item x
5867
section is executable
5868
@item M
5869
section is mergeable
5870
@item S
5871
section contains zero terminated strings
5872
@item G
5873
section is a member of a section group
5874
@item T
5875
section is used for thread-local-storage
5876
@item ?
5877
section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
5878
@end table
5879
 
5880
The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5881
@table @code
5882
@item @@progbits
5883
section contains data
5884
@item @@nobits
5885
section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5886
@item @@note
5887
section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5888
@item @@init_array
5889
section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5890
@item @@fini_array
5891
section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
5892
@item @@preinit_array
5893
section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
5894
@end table
5895
 
5896
Many targets only support the first three section types.
5897
 
5898
Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
5899
ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
5900
@code{%} character.
5901
 
5902
If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5903
be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
5904
 
5905
@smallexample
5906
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
5907
@end smallexample
5908
 
5909
Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
5910
constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
5911
@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
5912
@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
5913
the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
5914
absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
5915
which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
5916
@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
5917
@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
5918
 
5919
If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5920
be present along with an additional field like this:
5921
 
5922
@smallexample
5923
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5924
@end smallexample
5925
 
5926
The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
5927
particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
5928
@table @code
5929
@item comdat
5930
indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
5931
@item .gnu.linkonce
5932
an alias for comdat
5933
@end table
5934
 
5935
Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
5936
the Merge flag should come first, like this:
5937
 
5938
@smallexample
5939
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5940
@end smallexample
5941
 
5942
If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
5943
@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
5944
present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
5945
this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
5946
@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
5947
If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
5948
 
5949
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5950
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
5951
none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
5952
executable.  The section will contain data.
5953
 
5954
For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
5955
directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
5956
 
5957
@smallexample
5958
.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
5959
@end smallexample
5960
 
5961
Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
5962
separated flags:
5963
@table @code
5964
@item #alloc
5965
section is allocatable
5966
@item #write
5967
section is writable
5968
@item #execinstr
5969
section is executable
5970
@item #exclude
5971
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5972
@item #tls
5973
section is used for thread local storage
5974
@end table
5975
 
5976
This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
5977
contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
5978
some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
5979
work.
5980
@end ifset
5981
@end ifset
5982
 
5983
@node Set
5984
@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5985
 
5986
@cindex @code{set} directive
5987
@cindex symbol value, setting
5988
Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
5989
changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
5990
@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
5991
flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
5992
 
5993
You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
5994
 
5995
If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
5996
file is the last value stored into it.
5997
 
5998
@ifset Z80
5999
On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6000
@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6001
@end ifset
6002
 
6003
@node Short
6004
@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6005
 
6006
@cindex @code{short} directive
6007
@ifset GENERIC
6008
@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6009
@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6010
 
6011
In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6012
numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6013
@end ifset
6014
@ifclear GENERIC
6015
@ifset W16
6016
@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6017
@end ifset
6018
@ifset W32
6019
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6020
a 16 bit number for each.
6021
@end ifset
6022
@end ifclear
6023
 
6024
@node Single
6025
@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6026
 
6027
@cindex @code{single} directive
6028
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6029
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
6030
has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6031
@ifset GENERIC
6032
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6033
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6034
@end ifset
6035
@ifclear GENERIC
6036
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6037
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6038
numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6039
@end ifset
6040
@end ifclear
6041
 
6042
@ifset COFF-ELF
6043
@node Size
6044
@section @code{.size}
6045
 
6046
This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6047
 
6048
@ifset COFF
6049
@ifset ELF
6050
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6051
@subheading COFF Version
6052
@end ifset
6053
 
6054
@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6055
For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6056
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6057
 
6058
@smallexample
6059
.size @var{expression}
6060
@end smallexample
6061
 
6062
@ifset BOUT
6063
@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6064
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6065
ignores it.
6066
@end ifset
6067
@end ifset
6068
 
6069
@ifset ELF
6070
@ifset COFF
6071
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6072
@subheading ELF Version
6073
@end ifset
6074
 
6075
@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6076
For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6077
 
6078
@smallexample
6079
.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6080
@end smallexample
6081
 
6082
This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6083
The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6084
arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6085
symbols.
6086
@end ifset
6087
@end ifset
6088
 
6089
@ifclear no-space-dir
6090
@node Skip
6091
@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6092
 
6093
@cindex @code{skip} directive
6094
@cindex filling memory
6095
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6096
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6097
@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6098
@samp{.space}.
6099
@end ifclear
6100
 
6101
@node Sleb128
6102
@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6103
 
6104
@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6105
@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6106
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6107
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6108
 
6109
@ifclear no-space-dir
6110
@node Space
6111
@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6112
 
6113
@cindex @code{space} directive
6114
@cindex filling memory
6115
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6116
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6117
and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6118
as @samp{.skip}.
6119
 
6120
@ifset HPPA
6121
@quotation
6122
@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6123
targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6124
Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6125
@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6126
for a summary.
6127
@end quotation
6128
@end ifset
6129
@end ifclear
6130
 
6131
@ifset have-stabs
6132
@node Stab
6133
@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6134
 
6135
@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6136
@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6137
There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6138
All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6139
The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6140
cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6141
Up to five fields are required:
6142
 
6143
@table @var
6144
@item string
6145
This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6146
@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6147
debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6148
using this field.
6149
 
6150
@item type
6151
An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6152
this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6153
and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6154
 
6155
@item other
6156
An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6157
low 8 bits of this expression.
6158
 
6159
@item desc
6160
An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6161
bits of this expression.
6162
 
6163
@item value
6164
An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6165
@end table
6166
 
6167
If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6168
or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6169
you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6170
compatible with earlier assemblers!
6171
 
6172
@table @code
6173
@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6174
@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6175
 
6176
The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6177
It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6178
null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6179
strings.
6180
 
6181
The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6182
relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6183
is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6184
assembled.
6185
 
6186
@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6187
@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6188
The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6189
 
6190
@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6191
@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6192
All five fields are specified.
6193
@end table
6194
@end ifset
6195
@c end     have-stabs
6196
 
6197
@node String
6198
@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6199
"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6200
 
6201
@cindex string, copying to object file
6202
@cindex string8, copying to object file
6203
@cindex string16, copying to object file
6204
@cindex string32, copying to object file
6205
@cindex string64, copying to object file
6206
@cindex @code{string} directive
6207
@cindex @code{string8} directive
6208
@cindex @code{string16} directive
6209
@cindex @code{string32} directive
6210
@cindex @code{string64} directive
6211
 
6212
Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6213
one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6214
particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6215
You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6216
 
6217
The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6218
the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6219
copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6220
are stored in target endianness byte order.
6221
 
6222
Example:
6223
@smallexample
6224
        .string32 "BYE"
6225
expands to:
6226
        .string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6227
        .string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6228
@end smallexample
6229
 
6230
 
6231
@node Struct
6232
@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6233
 
6234
@cindex @code{struct} directive
6235
Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6236
which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6237
@smallexample
6238
        .struct 0
6239
field1:
6240
        .struct field1 + 4
6241
field2:
6242
        .struct field2 + 4
6243
field3:
6244
@end smallexample
6245
This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6246
@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6247
value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6248
use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6249
before further assembly.
6250
 
6251
@ifset ELF
6252
@node SubSection
6253
@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6254
 
6255
@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6256
@cindex Section Stack
6257
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6258
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6259
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6260
(@pxref{Previous}).
6261
 
6262
This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6263
section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6264
in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6265
@end ifset
6266
 
6267
@ifset ELF
6268
@node Symver
6269
@section @code{.symver}
6270
@cindex @code{symver} directive
6271
@cindex symbol versioning
6272
@cindex versions of symbols
6273
Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6274
within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6275
typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6276
There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6277
into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6278
shared library.
6279
 
6280
For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6281
@smallexample
6282
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6283
@end smallexample
6284
If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6285
being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6286
alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6287
just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6288
permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6289
of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6290
itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6291
have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6292
file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6293
function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6294
the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6295
building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6296
symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6297
nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6298
 
6299
If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6300
references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6301
reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6302
symbol table.
6303
 
6304
Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6305
@smallexample
6306
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6307
@end smallexample
6308
In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6309
the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6310
difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6311
references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6312
 
6313
The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6314
@smallexample
6315
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6316
@end smallexample
6317
When @var{name} is not defined within the
6318
file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6319
@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6320
name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6321
@end ifset
6322
 
6323
@ifset COFF
6324
@node Tag
6325
@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6326
 
6327
@cindex COFF structure debugging
6328
@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6329
@cindex @code{tag} directive
6330
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6331
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6332
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
6333
definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6334
@ifset BOUT
6335
 
6336
@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6337
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6338
ignores it.
6339
@end ifset
6340
@end ifset
6341
 
6342
@node Text
6343
@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6344
 
6345
@cindex @code{text} directive
6346
Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6347
the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6348
expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6349
is used.
6350
 
6351
@node Title
6352
@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6353
 
6354
@cindex @code{title} directive
6355
@cindex listing control: title line
6356
Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6357
source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6358
 
6359
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6360
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6361
 
6362
@ifset COFF-ELF
6363
@node Type
6364
@section @code{.type}
6365
 
6366
This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6367
 
6368
@ifset COFF
6369
@ifset ELF
6370
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6371
@subheading COFF Version
6372
@end ifset
6373
 
6374
@cindex COFF symbol type
6375
@cindex symbol type, COFF
6376
@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6377
For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6378
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6379
 
6380
@smallexample
6381
.type @var{int}
6382
@end smallexample
6383
 
6384
This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6385
entry.
6386
 
6387
@ifset BOUT
6388
@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6389
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6390
directive but ignores it.
6391
@end ifset
6392
@end ifset
6393
 
6394
@ifset ELF
6395
@ifset COFF
6396
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6397
@subheading ELF Version
6398
@end ifset
6399
 
6400
@cindex ELF symbol type
6401
@cindex symbol type, ELF
6402
@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6403
For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6404
 
6405
@smallexample
6406
.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6407
@end smallexample
6408
 
6409
This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6410
function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
6411
supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6412
compatibility with various other assemblers.
6413
 
6414
Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6415
@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6416
below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
6417
the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6418
maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6419
assemblers.
6420
 
6421
The syntaxes supported are:
6422
 
6423
@smallexample
6424
  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6425
  .type <name>,#<type>
6426
  .type <name>,@@<type>
6427
  .type <name>,%<type>
6428
  .type <name>,"<type>"
6429
@end smallexample
6430
 
6431
The types supported are:
6432
 
6433
@table @gcctabopt
6434
@item STT_FUNC
6435
@itemx function
6436
Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6437
 
6438
@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6439
@itemx gnu_indirect_function
6440
Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6441
processing.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6442
 
6443
@item STT_OBJECT
6444
@itemx object
6445
Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6446
 
6447
@item STT_TLS
6448
@itemx tls_object
6449
Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6450
 
6451
@item STT_COMMON
6452
@itemx common
6453
Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6454
 
6455
@item STT_NOTYPE
6456
@itemx notype
6457
Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
6458
 
6459
@item gnu_unique_object
6460
Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
6461
will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6462
name and type in use.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6463
 
6464
@end table
6465
 
6466
Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6467
 
6468
@end ifset
6469
@end ifset
6470
 
6471
@node Uleb128
6472
@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6473
 
6474
@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6475
@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
6476
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6477
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6478
 
6479
@ifset COFF
6480
@node Val
6481
@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6482
 
6483
@cindex @code{val} directive
6484
@cindex COFF value attribute
6485
@cindex value attribute, COFF
6486
This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6487
records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6488
entry.
6489
@ifset BOUT
6490
 
6491
@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6492
configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6493
@end ifset
6494
@end ifset
6495
 
6496
@ifset ELF
6497
@node Version
6498
@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6499
 
6500
@cindex @code{version} directive
6501
This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6502
formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6503
@end ifset
6504
 
6505
@ifset ELF
6506
@node VTableEntry
6507
@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6508
 
6509
@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6510
This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6511
@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6512
 
6513
@node VTableInherit
6514
@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6515
 
6516
@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6517
This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6518
@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6519
parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
6520
parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6521
@end ifset
6522
 
6523
@node Warning
6524
@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6525
@cindex warning directive
6526
Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6527
(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6528
 
6529
@node Weak
6530
@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6531
 
6532
@cindex @code{weak} directive
6533
This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6534
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6535
 
6536
On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
6537
directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6538
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6539
 
6540
On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6541
When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6542
alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6543
 
6544
@node Weakref
6545
@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6546
 
6547
@cindex @code{weakref} directive
6548
This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6549
be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6550
If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6551
will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6552
symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6553
 
6554
The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6555
assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6556
symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6557
resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6558
had the references to the alias removed.
6559
 
6560
The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6561
within the assembler.
6562
 
6563
@node Word
6564
@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6565
 
6566
@cindex @code{word} directive
6567
This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6568
separated by commas.
6569
@ifclear GENERIC
6570
@ifset W32
6571
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6572
@end ifset
6573
@ifset W16
6574
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6575
@end ifset
6576
@end ifclear
6577
@ifset GENERIC
6578
 
6579
The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6580
depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6581
@end ifset
6582
 
6583
@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6584
@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6585
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6586
@cindex difference tables altered
6587
@cindex altered difference tables
6588
@quotation
6589
@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6590
@end quotation
6591
 
6592
@ifset GENERIC
6593
Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6594
addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
6595
interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6596
@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6597
 
6598
@end ifset
6599
In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6600
@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6601
Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6602
compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6603
directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6604
@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6605
creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6606
This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6607
first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
6608
of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
6609
table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
6610
contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6611
@code{sym2}.
6612
 
6613
If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6614
secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
6615
@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6616
long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6617
and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6618
minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6619
entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6620
 
6621
@ifset INTERNALS
6622
@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6623
@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6624
assembly language programmers.
6625
@end ifset
6626
@end ifset
6627
@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6628
 
6629
@node Deprecated
6630
@section Deprecated Directives
6631
 
6632
@cindex deprecated directives
6633
@cindex obsolescent directives
6634
One day these directives won't work.
6635
They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6636
@table @t
6637
@item .abort
6638
@item .line
6639
@end table
6640
 
6641
@ifset ELF
6642
@node Object Attributes
6643
@chapter Object Attributes
6644
@cindex object attributes
6645
 
6646
@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6647
into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
6648
Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
6649
point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6650
requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6651
passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6652
hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
6653
generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6654
newer generation at run-time.
6655
 
6656
This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
6657
@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
6658
time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6659
correctly.
6660
 
6661
Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
6662
attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
6663
string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
6664
and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
6665
or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
6666
attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6667
 
6668
Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6669
The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6670
 
6671
@menu
6672
* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6673
* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
6674
@end menu
6675
 
6676
@node GNU Object Attributes
6677
@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6678
 
6679
The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6680
with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6681
 
6682
Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6683
its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6684
an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6685
2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6686
architecture-dependent ones.
6687
 
6688
@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6689
 
6690
These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6691
 
6692
@table @r
6693
@item Tag_compatibility (32)
6694
The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
6695
the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
6696
then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
6697
than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6698
arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6699
@end table
6700
 
6701
@subsection MIPS Attributes
6702
 
6703
@table @r
6704
@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6705
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6706
 
6707
@itemize @bullet
6708
@item
6709
 
6710
@item
6711
1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6712
FPU.
6713
@item
6714
2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6715
@item
6716
3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6717
@item
6718
4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6719
double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6720
purpose registers.
6721
@end itemize
6722
@end table
6723
 
6724
@subsection PowerPC Attributes
6725
 
6726
@table @r
6727
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6728
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6729
 
6730
@itemize @bullet
6731
@item
6732
 
6733
@item
6734
1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6735
@item
6736
2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6737
@item
6738
3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6739
@end itemize
6740
 
6741
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6742
The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6743
 
6744
@itemize @bullet
6745
@item
6746
 
6747
@item
6748
1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6749
@item
6750
2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6751
@item
6752
3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6753
@end itemize
6754
@end table
6755
 
6756
@node Defining New Object Attributes
6757
@section Defining New Object Attributes
6758
 
6759
If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6760
will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6761
mailing list.
6762
 
6763
@itemize @bullet
6764
@item
6765
This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6766
@item
6767
The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6768
@item
6769
The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6770
and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6771
@item
6772
Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6773
@item
6774
@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6775
@item
6776
GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6777
@end itemize
6778
 
6779
@end ifset
6780
 
6781
@ifset GENERIC
6782
@node Machine Dependencies
6783
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6784
 
6785
@cindex machine dependencies
6786
The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6787
each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
6788
vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6789
directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6790
assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
6791
@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6792
optimization.
6793
 
6794
This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6795
include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
6796
subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6797
 
6798
@menu
6799
@ifset ALPHA
6800
* Alpha-Dependent::             Alpha Dependent Features
6801
@end ifset
6802
@ifset ARC
6803
* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
6804
@end ifset
6805
@ifset ARM
6806
* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
6807
@end ifset
6808
@ifset AVR
6809
* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
6810
@end ifset
6811
@ifset Blackfin
6812
* Blackfin-Dependent::          Blackfin Dependent Features
6813
@end ifset
6814
@ifset CR16
6815
* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
6816
@end ifset
6817
@ifset CRIS
6818
* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
6819
@end ifset
6820
@ifset D10V
6821
* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
6822
@end ifset
6823
@ifset D30V
6824
* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
6825
@end ifset
6826
@ifset H8/300
6827
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6828
@end ifset
6829
@ifset HPPA
6830
* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
6831
@end ifset
6832
@ifset I370
6833
* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6834
@end ifset
6835
@ifset I80386
6836
* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6837
@end ifset
6838
@ifset I860
6839
* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6840
@end ifset
6841
@ifset I960
6842
* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6843
@end ifset
6844
@ifset IA64
6845
* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6846
@end ifset
6847
@ifset IP2K
6848
* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
6849
@end ifset
6850
@ifset LM32
6851
* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
6852
@end ifset
6853
@ifset M32C
6854
* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
6855
@end ifset
6856
@ifset M32R
6857
* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
6858
@end ifset
6859
@ifset M680X0
6860
* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
6861
@end ifset
6862
@ifset M68HC11
6863
* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6864
@end ifset
6865
@ifset MICROBLAZE
6866
* MicroBlaze-Dependent::        MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6867
@end ifset
6868
@ifset MIPS
6869
* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
6870
@end ifset
6871
@ifset MMIX
6872
* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
6873
@end ifset
6874
@ifset MSP430
6875
* MSP430-Dependent::            MSP430 Dependent Features
6876
@end ifset
6877
@ifset NS32K
6878
* NS32K-Dependent::             NS32K Dependent Features
6879
@end ifset
6880
@ifset SH
6881
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6882
* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6883
@end ifset
6884
@ifset PDP11
6885
* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
6886
@end ifset
6887
@ifset PJ
6888
* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
6889
@end ifset
6890
@ifset PPC
6891
* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
6892
@end ifset
6893
@ifset RX
6894
* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
6895
@end ifset
6896
@ifset S390
6897
* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
6898
@end ifset
6899
@ifset SCORE
6900
* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
6901
@end ifset
6902
@ifset SPARC
6903
* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
6904
@end ifset
6905
@ifset TIC54X
6906
* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
6907
@end ifset
6908
@ifset TIC6X
6909
* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
6910
@end ifset
6911 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
6912
* TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
6913
@end ifset
6914
@ifset TILEPRO
6915
* TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
6916
@end ifset
6917 147 khays
@ifset V850
6918
* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
6919
@end ifset
6920
@ifset XTENSA
6921
* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
6922
@end ifset
6923
@ifset Z80
6924
* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
6925
@end ifset
6926
@ifset Z8000
6927
* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
6928
@end ifset
6929
@ifset VAX
6930
* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
6931
@end ifset
6932
@end menu
6933
 
6934
@lowersections
6935
@end ifset
6936
 
6937
@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
6938
@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
6939
@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
6940
@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
6941
@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
6942
@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
6943
@c in both conditional blocks.
6944
 
6945
@ifset ALPHA
6946
@include c-alpha.texi
6947
@end ifset
6948
 
6949
@ifset ARC
6950
@include c-arc.texi
6951
@end ifset
6952
 
6953
@ifset ARM
6954
@include c-arm.texi
6955
@end ifset
6956
 
6957
@ifset AVR
6958
@include c-avr.texi
6959
@end ifset
6960
 
6961
@ifset Blackfin
6962
@include c-bfin.texi
6963
@end ifset
6964
 
6965
@ifset CR16
6966
@include c-cr16.texi
6967
@end ifset
6968
 
6969
@ifset CRIS
6970
@include c-cris.texi
6971
@end ifset
6972
 
6973
@ifset Renesas-all
6974
@ifclear GENERIC
6975
@node Machine Dependencies
6976
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6977
 
6978
The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
6979
and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
6980
chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
6981
family.
6982
 
6983
@menu
6984
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6985
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
6986
@end menu
6987
@lowersections
6988
@end ifclear
6989
@end ifset
6990
 
6991
@ifset D10V
6992
@include c-d10v.texi
6993
@end ifset
6994
 
6995
@ifset D30V
6996
@include c-d30v.texi
6997
@end ifset
6998
 
6999
@ifset H8/300
7000
@include c-h8300.texi
7001
@end ifset
7002
 
7003
@ifset HPPA
7004
@include c-hppa.texi
7005
@end ifset
7006
 
7007
@ifset I370
7008
@include c-i370.texi
7009
@end ifset
7010
 
7011
@ifset I80386
7012
@include c-i386.texi
7013
@end ifset
7014
 
7015
@ifset I860
7016
@include c-i860.texi
7017
@end ifset
7018
 
7019
@ifset I960
7020
@include c-i960.texi
7021
@end ifset
7022
 
7023
@ifset IA64
7024
@include c-ia64.texi
7025
@end ifset
7026
 
7027
@ifset IP2K
7028
@include c-ip2k.texi
7029
@end ifset
7030
 
7031
@ifset LM32
7032
@include c-lm32.texi
7033
@end ifset
7034
 
7035
@ifset M32C
7036
@include c-m32c.texi
7037
@end ifset
7038
 
7039
@ifset M32R
7040
@include c-m32r.texi
7041
@end ifset
7042
 
7043
@ifset M680X0
7044
@include c-m68k.texi
7045
@end ifset
7046
 
7047
@ifset M68HC11
7048
@include c-m68hc11.texi
7049
@end ifset
7050
 
7051
@ifset MICROBLAZE
7052
@include c-microblaze.texi
7053
@end ifset
7054
 
7055
@ifset MIPS
7056
@include c-mips.texi
7057
@end ifset
7058
 
7059
@ifset MMIX
7060
@include c-mmix.texi
7061
@end ifset
7062
 
7063
@ifset MSP430
7064
@include c-msp430.texi
7065
@end ifset
7066
 
7067
@ifset NS32K
7068
@include c-ns32k.texi
7069
@end ifset
7070
 
7071
@ifset PDP11
7072
@include c-pdp11.texi
7073
@end ifset
7074
 
7075
@ifset PJ
7076
@include c-pj.texi
7077
@end ifset
7078
 
7079
@ifset PPC
7080
@include c-ppc.texi
7081
@end ifset
7082
 
7083
@ifset RX
7084
@include c-rx.texi
7085
@end ifset
7086
 
7087
@ifset S390
7088
@include c-s390.texi
7089
@end ifset
7090
 
7091
@ifset SCORE
7092
@include c-score.texi
7093
@end ifset
7094
 
7095
@ifset SH
7096
@include c-sh.texi
7097
@include c-sh64.texi
7098
@end ifset
7099
 
7100
@ifset SPARC
7101
@include c-sparc.texi
7102
@end ifset
7103
 
7104
@ifset TIC54X
7105
@include c-tic54x.texi
7106
@end ifset
7107
 
7108
@ifset TIC6X
7109
@include c-tic6x.texi
7110
@end ifset
7111
 
7112 148 khays
@ifset TILEGX
7113
@include c-tilegx.texi
7114
@end ifset
7115
 
7116
@ifset TILEPRO
7117
@include c-tilepro.texi
7118
@end ifset
7119
 
7120 147 khays
@ifset Z80
7121
@include c-z80.texi
7122
@end ifset
7123
 
7124
@ifset Z8000
7125
@include c-z8k.texi
7126
@end ifset
7127
 
7128
@ifset VAX
7129
@include c-vax.texi
7130
@end ifset
7131
 
7132
@ifset V850
7133
@include c-v850.texi
7134
@end ifset
7135
 
7136
@ifset XTENSA
7137
@include c-xtensa.texi
7138
@end ifset
7139
 
7140
@ifset GENERIC
7141
@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7142
@raisesections
7143
@end ifset
7144
 
7145
@node Reporting Bugs
7146
@chapter Reporting Bugs
7147
@cindex bugs in assembler
7148
@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7149
 
7150
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7151
 
7152
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7153
not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7154
entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7155
Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7156
 
7157
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7158
information that enables us to fix the bug.
7159
 
7160
@menu
7161
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7162
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7163
@end menu
7164
 
7165
@node Bug Criteria
7166
@section Have You Found a Bug?
7167
@cindex bug criteria
7168
 
7169
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7170
 
7171
@itemize @bullet
7172
@cindex fatal signal
7173
@cindex assembler crash
7174
@cindex crash of assembler
7175
@item
7176
If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7177
@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7178
 
7179
@cindex error on valid input
7180
@item
7181
If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7182
 
7183
@cindex invalid input
7184
@item
7185
If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7186
is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7187
be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7188
 
7189
@item
7190
If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7191
of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7192
@end itemize
7193
 
7194
@node Bug Reporting
7195
@section How to Report Bugs
7196
@cindex bug reports
7197
@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7198
 
7199
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7200
you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7201
contact that organization first.
7202
 
7203
You can find contact information for many support companies and
7204
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7205
distribution.
7206
 
7207
@ifset BUGURL
7208
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7209
to @value{BUGURL}.
7210
@end ifset
7211
 
7212
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7213
@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7214
fact or leave it out, state it!
7215
 
7216
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7217
and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7218
name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7219
not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7220
happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7221
perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7222
the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
7223
give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7224
and the most helpful.
7225
 
7226
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7227
it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7228
that the bug has not been reported previously.
7229
 
7230
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7231
bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7232
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7233
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7234
 
7235
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7236
 
7237
@itemize @bullet
7238
@item
7239
The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7240
it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7241
 
7242
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7243
the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7244
 
7245
@item
7246
Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7247
 
7248
@item
7249
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7250
version number.
7251
 
7252
@item
7253
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7254
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7255
 
7256
@item
7257
The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7258
observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7259
all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7260
 
7261
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7262
and then we might not encounter the bug.
7263
 
7264
@item
7265
A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
7266
the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7267
high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7268
when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7269
the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7270
file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7271
@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7272
 
7273
@item
7274
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7275
incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7276
 
7277
Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7278
will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7279
notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
7280
make a mistake.
7281
 
7282
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7283
explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7284
@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7285
library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
7286
would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7287
would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
7288
expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7289
observations.
7290
 
7291
@item
7292
If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7293
diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7294
option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
7295
discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7296
by line number.
7297
 
7298
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7299
sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7300
@end itemize
7301
 
7302
Here are some things that are not necessary:
7303
 
7304
@itemize @bullet
7305
@item
7306
A description of the envelope of the bug.
7307
 
7308
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7309
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7310
changes will not affect it.
7311
 
7312
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7313
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7314
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7315
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7316
 
7317
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7318
of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
7319
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7320
less time, and so on.
7321
 
7322
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7323
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7324
 
7325
@item
7326
A patch for the bug.
7327
 
7328
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
7329
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7330
a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
7331
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7332
 
7333
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7334
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7335
the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7336
one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7337
 
7338
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7339
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
7340
help us to understand.
7341
 
7342
@item
7343
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7344
 
7345
Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
7346
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7347
@end itemize
7348
 
7349
@node Acknowledgements
7350
@chapter Acknowledgements
7351
 
7352
If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7353
it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
7354
maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
7355
@c (January 1994),
7356
the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7357
 
7358
Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7359
more details?}
7360
 
7361
Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7362
information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7363
extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7364
 
7365
K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7366
many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7367
up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7368
testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7369
including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7370
and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7371
support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7372
port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7373
file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7374
assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7375
 
7376
Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7377
in format-specific I/O modules.
7378
 
7379
The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
7380
has done much work with it since.
7381
 
7382
The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7383
 
7384
Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7385
 
7386
The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7387
University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7388
 
7389
Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7390
(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7391
(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7392
support a.out format.
7393
 
7394
Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7395
tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7396
Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7397
use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7398
targets.
7399
 
7400
John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7401
simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
7402
updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7403
fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7404
remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7405
cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7406
required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7407
 
7408
Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7409
68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7410
added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7411
PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7412
 
7413
Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7414
 
7415
Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7416
 
7417
Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7418
along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7419
formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7420
the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7421
 
7422
Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7423
Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7424
Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7425
Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7426
and some initial 64-bit support).
7427
 
7428
Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7429
 
7430
Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7431
support for openVMS/Alpha.
7432
 
7433
Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7434
flavors.
7435
 
7436
David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7437
Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7438
 
7439
Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7440
configuration enhancements.
7441
 
7442
Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7443
 
7444
Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
7445
you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7446
want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7447
intentionally leaving anyone out.
7448
 
7449
@node GNU Free Documentation License
7450
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7451
@include fdl.texi
7452
 
7453
@node AS Index
7454
@unnumbered AS Index
7455
 
7456
@printindex cp
7457
 
7458
@bye
7459
@c Local Variables:
7460
@c fill-column: 79
7461
@c End:

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.